JP2023099849A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing management of a game machine.SOLUTION: A main-side CPU 63 stores information on a detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in each kind of counter area of a main-side RAM 65 as history information. In reception of an instruction signal for starting checking from a hall computer of a game hall, each kind of parameter is calculated by utilizing history information of each kind of counter area, and the calculation result is reported by utilizing a special pattern display part 37a and a normal pattern display part 38a. In calculation of each kind parameter by utilizing the history information, shooting of game balls is prohibited and execution of a game round or the like is suspended. More specifically, progress of a game is restricted. Execution of a performance in a pattern display device 41 is continued even in a state in which progress of the game is restricted. After that, at a lapse of a display period of a check result, a state in which progress of a game is restricted is canceled.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 50

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray reservoir are discharged to the lower tray reservoir by being guided by the device (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably managing the gaming machine.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides an effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that the effect is executed,
Limiting means for limiting the progress of a game based on the occurrence of a limit opportunity;
with
The effect control means is characterized in that the effect continues to be executed even if the restriction means restricts the progress of the game.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably manage a gaming machine.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration related to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning or losing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting a detection result of a ball-entering detection sensor to the main side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various devices which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by payout side CPU. 3 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence memory; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (d) are time charts showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers and signal types is stored in a correspondence memory. 9 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; (a) to (e) are time charts showing how history information is stored in the history memory. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F in the second embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed by main side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by a management-side CPU; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers and the types of signals is stored in the correspondence memory. FIG. 11 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed by management side CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the power failure handling process performed by management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the trigger specific processing performed by main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by management side CPU. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing trigger identification processing executed by the main CPU in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by a management-side CPU in the seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory in the ninth embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of an MPU of a main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port of a management-side I/F; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a history memory; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; 4 is a flowchart showing external output processing executed by a management-side CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a signal path for transmitting detection results of each entering ball detection sensor to the main side CPU and management IC in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining electrical configurations of a main control device and a sound emission control device in a thirteenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric control processing performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing performed by sound and light side CPU. It is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric starting process performed by main side CPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal counter area, an opening/closing execution mode counter area, and a high-frequency support mode counter area provided in a main RAM; It is a flowchart which shows the entering ball detection process performed by main side CPU. 10 is a flow chart showing normal ball entry detection processing executed by the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed by main side CPU. (A) is a front view of the special figure display unit, (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display unit, (b) is a front view of the general figure display unit, (B) is a general FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a diagram display unit; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing check waiting processing executed by the main CPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during display of the check result performed by main side CPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. (a) to (j) are diagrams individually showing symbols that are variably displayed by the symbol display device. (a), (b) It is a figure which shows the display surface of a pattern display apparatus. (a) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents of the pattern display device during a check waiting period or a check result display period. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing check processing executed by the main CPU in the fourteenth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during display of the check result performed by main side CPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of an input port provided in the MPU of the sound emission control device according to the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a correspondence relationship area provided in a sound and light ROM; 9 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing performed by sound and light side CPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal counter area, an open/close execution mode counter area, and a high-frequency support mode counter area provided in the sound and light side RAM; 10 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by the sound and light side CPU; 10 is a flowchart showing check processing executed by the sound and light side CPU; FIG. 32 is a front view of a main controller in a sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 78; FIG. 32 is a front view of the slot machine in the seventeenth embodiment; 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine with its front door opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the pattern arrangement of each reel. It is a front view of a display window part. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the winning mode established when the normal mode lottery table is selected; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT mode. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing migration chance management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for illumination performed by main side MPU. (a), (b) It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the opening angle of a front door, and the control state of a device for lighting. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting device when the front door is in an open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle; (b) the opening angle of the front door is the maximum opening; It is an explanatory view for explaining a state of a lighting device when it is an angle. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main-side RAM in the eighteenth embodiment; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the total accumulation buffer FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the first accumulation buffer; FIG. 4D is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters provided in the second accumulation buffer; It is an explanatory diagram for. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how game histories are managed. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing target switching processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of a management IC in the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configurations of a first history memory and a second history memory; 7 is a flowchart showing history setting processing executed by a management CPU; 9 is a flowchart showing target switching processing executed by a management-side CPU;

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration inside the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for the sake of convenience.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. have. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plates on four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. A pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by fixing an outer frame 11 to an island facility. Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 does not have to have the outer frame 11, and the pachinko machine 10 may have a structure in which the outer frame 11 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the game machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its turning tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 that has substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 . A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21 . A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21 . The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 23 of the resin base 21 .

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24. FIG.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The guide rail is configured as A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by guide rails.

Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper tray 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and a and a solenoid 27c, which is an electric actuator that shoots the game ball supplied to the guide rail toward the guide rail. When a shooting operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, a solenoid 27c is driven and controlled to shoot a game ball.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, etc. ing. A total of four general winning openings 31 are provided, and the others are provided one each.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 or when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 , one prize ball is paid out, and when one game ball enters the general prize winning port 31, ten prize balls are paid out, and the special electric prize winning device 32 When one game ball is entered, 15 prize balls are paid out.

In addition, the number of prize balls is arbitrary, for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may be the first operation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening. A mode in which the liquid continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of game balls into the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game ball is also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning to the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, the internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Variation display of the pattern is performed in the section 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display device. , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly indicated through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display portion 37a is narrower than the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. In the special figure display section 37a, a variable display or a predetermined display of the pattern is performed by performing a winning lottery with the winning of the first operation opening 33 or the winning of the second operation opening 34 as a trigger. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , CRT or other type of display such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or multiple types of colors is displayed.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display screen such as a CRT, or a dot matrix display device. may

In the design display device 41, when the fluctuation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a based on the winning to the first operation port 33 or the winning to the second operation port 34, the pattern is displayed according to it A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows of upper, middle and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas. The symbols are scroll-displayed in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, scroll display is first started in all symbol rows, then the scroll display is switched to standby display in the order of upper symbol row→lower symbol row→middle symbol row. The game ends with the design still displayed. Then, for example, in a game cycle in which the game result is a jackpot result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the activated line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG.

In the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, but also the display effect during the opening/closing execution mode that shifts after winning is performed. will be In addition, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33, 34, the display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined result is displayed and the end is one of the game rounds. times. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

When a big win is won in a winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, it shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. The special electric prize winning device 32 has a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and has an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. It has become. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state.

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to discharge of game balls that have flowed down the game area PA.

As already explained, a game ball entering any one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34 and the out opening 24a is discharged from the game area PA. In other words, the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flowed into the game area PA is any of the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a It will be discharged from the game area PA by entering the ball into. A game ball entering any one of the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a is led to the back side of the game board 24.例文帳に追加

On the back surface of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed corresponding to the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34 and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passages 42 to 48 are led to the lower end of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24 by flowing down the discharge passages 42 to 48 into which they flowed in, and are sent to a discharge ball recovery section (not shown). is recovered. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collecting section are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the discharge passages 42 to 48, respectively. These discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since four general prize winning openings 31 are provided as already explained, there are discharge passage portions 42 to 44 corresponding to each of these four openings. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general prize winning port 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 adjacent thereto. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage portion 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage portion 43. A second winning hole detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. The game ball entering the leftmost general winning hole 31 is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a while passing through the first discharge passage part 42, and enters the general winning hole 31 on the right side. The ball is detected by the second winning opening detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. FIG. In addition, a third discharge passage portion 44 is formed so as to join the two general prize winning openings 31 on the right side at a midway position. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an entrance side area corresponding to each of the two general winning openings 31, and has one exit side area by joining the entrance side areas in the middle. are doing. A third winning opening detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side area of the third discharge passage portion 44 . A game ball entering one of the two right-side general winning holes 31 is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44. - 特許庁

A fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32 . A special electric detection sensor 45a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and the game ball entering the special electric prize winning device 32 passes through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first operation port 33 . A first operation opening detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and the game ball entering the first operation opening 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. It is detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a while passing through. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second operation port 34 . A second operation opening detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and the game ball entering the second operation opening 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. It is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a while it is passing through. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 is present corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and the game ball entering the out port 24a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

A game ball that is detected by any one of the various detection sensors 42a to 48a will not be detected by the other detection sensors 42a to 48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and the game ball passing through the through gate 35 on the way down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

Electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used as the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, but any sensor can be used as long as the game balls can be detected individually. Further, the various detection sensors 42a-49a are electrically connected to a main controller 60 which will be described later, and detection results of the various detection sensors 42a-49a are output to the main controller 60. FIG. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal when the game ball is not detected, and output a HI level signal when the game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed without being limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21 . As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 through which substantially the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

A display light-emitting portion 53 is provided above the window portion 51 . A pair of left and right speaker units 54 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 55 bulging forward and a lower bulging portion 56 are vertically arranged below the window portion 51 . An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 56. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device, which will be described later, and guiding them toward the game ball launching mechanism 27 while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower plate 56a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 55a.

Next, the configuration of the rear side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24) for main control of the game. The main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. It should be noted that the substrate box 60a may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or provided with a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the means for traces, there is a configuration of a connecting portion that inseparably connects a plurality of case bodies that constitute the board box 60a and that requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon separation, and an adhesive layer that remains on the adhesion target when peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off is affixed so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box 60a is conceivable.

A back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60.例文帳に追加The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a controller assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72 .

The payout mechanism part 73 includes a tank 75 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75 . The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper tray 55a or the lower tray 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76.例文帳に追加The payout mechanism 73 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board having a power switch for turning the power ON and OFF.

The control device assembly unit 74 includes a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling a payout device 76, and a predetermined electric power required by various control devices, etc., is generated and output, and is accompanied by the operation of the shooting operation device 28 by the player. A power supply/shooting control device 78 for controlling the launching of game balls is provided. The payout control device 77 and the power supply/launch control device 78 are arranged so that the payout control device 77 is located behind the pachinko machine 10 .

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control device 60 comprises a main control board 61 that controls the main game, and a power outage monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 . The MPU 62 incorporates a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to a main CPU 63, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section. In addition to the elements described above, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

The main ROM 64 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require external power supply (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used exclusively for reading. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

The main RAM 65 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to retain data, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64 .

The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the game ball entry mode in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main side CPU 63 . Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the entry history of game balls to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the ball into the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is grasped according to the grasped ball entering history.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. An input side of the MPU 62 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout control device 77 provided in the main control device 60 . A power supply/emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 67 , and operating power is supplied to the MPU 62 via the power failure monitoring board 67 .

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to various sensors such as various incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. As already explained, the various ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, a second operating opening detection sensor 47a, an outlet opening detection sensor 48a, and a gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these ball-entering detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether a ball is entering each ball-entering section. Further, in the main CPU 63, various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the first operating port 33, and various lotteries are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected with a power failure monitor board 67, a payout control device 77 and a sound emission control device 81. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on, for example, a game ball entering a prize ball corresponding ball entry portion among the ball entry portions where the occurrence of the ball entry corresponds to the payout of the game ball. be. Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81 .

On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32b that opens and closes the open/close door 32a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34b that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation opening 34, A figure unit 37 and a general figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a and a special figure reservation display section 37b, but all of these are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Similarly, the normal map unit 38 is provided with a normal map display unit 38a and a normal map reservation display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU62. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

In other words, in the opening/closing execution mode, the driving control of the special electric driving unit 32b is executed in the main CPU 63 so that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed. Further, when the general electric accessory 34a is won in the open state, the main side CPU 63 executes drive control of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Moreover, display control of the special figure display part 37a is performed in main side CPU63 in the case of each game time. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to set the general electric accessory 34a to the open state is specified, the main side CPU 63 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a. Also, when the winning prize to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the display control of the special figure reservation display unit 37b in the main side CPU63 is executed, and when winning to the through gate 35 occurs, or when variable display is started in the normal pattern display unit 38a, the main CPU 63 controls the display of the normal pattern reservation display unit 38b.

The blackout monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power/launch control device 78 and monitors the maximum voltage output from the power/launch control device 78, which is a stable DC voltage of 24 volts. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 60 .

The power/emission control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc. are generated with the necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor, and even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power failure is used as the main power supply. Electric power for memory retention is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60 . The power/shooting control device 78 controls the shooting of the game ball shooting mechanism 27, and the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined shooting conditions are met.

The audio light emission control device 81 drives and controls the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60, and controls the display control device 82. is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81 .

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery Draws by Main Side CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

The main side CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the special figure display portion 37a, the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, the setting of the display of the normal figure display portion 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of winning generation, the big winning type counter C2 used when judging the big winning type, and the pattern display device 41 fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when doing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the hit random number counter C1, and the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the pattern display device 41 are determined. A variation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric accessory open counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the general electrical open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65. FIG.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is provided in the main side RAM 65 as acquisition information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34. stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

The pending storage area 65a comprises a pending area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. Together, a combination of each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as reserved information in one of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4.

In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs multiple times in succession, the first reservation area RE1 → the second Each numerical information is stored chronologically in order of reservation area RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. By providing four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. .

It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical value information stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and the start of one game round. At that time, the success or failure determination is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Each of the above counters will be described in detail.

First, the universal electrical role item release counter C4 will be described. For example, the general electric role item release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the general electric reservation area 65c of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the general electric role item 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously shot in the same manner in the game area PA, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 opens per unit time. A high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of states is relatively high and low.

In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the general electric open state in the general electric open lottery using the general electric accessory open counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). , in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electrical role 34a is in the open state when the general electrical open state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the open time for one time is set longer. It is In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the general electric open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs multiple times, the time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (that is, the The duration of one display on the display section 38a) is set short.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation opening 33 is higher than in the second operation opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation opening is higher than the first operation opening 33. The probability of winning a prize to the mouth 34 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of balls in his hand too much. It can be carried out.

In addition, the configuration for making the high-frequency support mode more frequent than the low-frequency support mode to become the electric power open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, in the electric power open lottery A configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the electric power open state is increased. In addition, after one general electric open lottery is performed, the time secured for the next general electric open lottery In a configuration where multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, in the high-frequency support mode, it is easier to select a shorter reserved time than in the low-frequency support mode, or is set so that the average reserved time is shorter. good too. In addition, the number of open times is increased, the open time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured after one electric power open lottery is held and the next electric power open lottery is held is shortened. The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a of the main side RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

The values of random numbers for winning the jackpot are stored in the main ROM 64 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the win/fail lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is twenty. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening .

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The results of these multiple jackpots are (1) the aspect of the opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) the first prize after the opening/closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operation port 34.

As a mode of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of winning to the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in both the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the round game is executed up to a predetermined number of times.

Here, the round game is continued until one of the following conditions is met: elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration time, or that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a prize in the special electric prize winning device 32. It is a game to play. In addition, the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the result of the big win is the same as the fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of the result of the big win triggered by the shift. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of the jackpot result.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of one-time opening mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from opening to closing of the special electric prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Specifically, a long-time mode in which the open duration is set to 29 sec, which is a long time, and a short-time mode, in which the open duration is set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, are set. It is

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 seconds. be done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open continuation time is set to be longer than the product of the shooting cycle of the game ball and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the opening duration is set to be shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when one opening is performed in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric winning device 32 will win the maximum number of prizes in one round game, and one time in the short-time mode. When the opening is performed for the first time, it is expected that no prize will be won to the special electric prize winning device 32, or if there will be a prize, it will be about one.

In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a long time mode in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode in each round game.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the special electric winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, and is not limited to the above value, and is arbitrary is.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. And, as such a distribution destination, a low probability jackpot result, a low prize winning high probability jackpot result, and a maximum profit jackpot result are set.

A low-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize-winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition.

The result of the low winning high probability jackpot is that the opening and closing execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the opening and closing execution mode ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. be. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big-hit state winning, and the game shifts to a big-hit state.

The maximum profit jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/failure lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success/failure lottery results in a big-hit state winning, and the game shifts to a big-hit state.

In relation to each game state described above, the normal game state is not the open/close execution mode, but the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode, and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. In addition, as the game result, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the low winning high probability jackpot result is not set. In addition, in the opening and closing execution mode in the low winning high probability jackpot result, the number of round games may be less than in the case of the low probability jackpot result and the maximum profit jackpot result.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" correspond to the low probability jackpot result, and "10 to 14" correspond to the low prize winning high probability jackpot result. , and "15 to 29" corresponds to the maximum winning jackpot result.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁The expected effect is a gaming machine equipped with a symbol display device 41 capable of displaying symbols in a variable manner, and in a game cycle that results in a predetermined big win, the final stop result is the award corresponding result. It is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to result in the grant correspondence result in the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started in . Concretely, a combination of symbols having the same number on any of the activated lines is stopped and displayed for the award correspondence result.

There are two types of expectation effects: a ready-to-win display and an advance notice display for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win display and the occurrence of the grant correspondence result in a stage before the occurrence of the ready-to-win display.

In the ready-to-win display, a combination of ready-to-win symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying the symbols of some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining symbols are displayed in that state. It includes a display state in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row. In addition, in a state in which the combinations of ready-to-win patterns are displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a ready-to-win effect. , the combination of the ready-to-win pattern is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform the ready-to-win effect.

In the advance notice display, after the pattern display is started on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41, the patterns are displayed in a variable manner in all the pattern rows, or in a part of the pattern rows and a plurality of patterns are displayed. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode is included in which characters are displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row. It also includes a background screen in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern row in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such an advance notice display can occur in any game cycle when the reach display is performed or when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The ready-to-win display is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in game rounds in which the same combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed. Also, in a game cycle corresponding to a big hit result in which the same combination of symbols is not stop-displayed, the game is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Also, in the game round corresponding to the result of losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing by referring to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 is executed when the reach display corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. .

On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the advance notice display is made not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission control device 81 . In this case, the sound emission control device 81 determines that the game round corresponding to one of the jackpot results is more likely to generate the notice display than the game round corresponding to the losing result, and that the notice display with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur. Lottery processing for advance notice display is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being likely to occur. Incidentally, the result of the lottery is reflected when the symbol display device 41 executes an effect for a game cycle.

Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main side CPU 63 determines the display continuation time in the special figure display unit 37a and the display continuation time of the design in the design display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41.

<Regarding the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed by the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 can be roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and further whether or not the power failure flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". Determine (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). step S107).

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the processing of step S108 on the condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. proceed to In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main side RAM 65 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Further, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output process for outputting various data to a reading device connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). The details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

Although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited at the stage when the main processing is started. The state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is released at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process of step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process of step S112 is started. Therefore, the main CPU 63 does not start the process for advancing the game until the relevant situation is reached.

After that, the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is performed. In other words, although the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time fluctuates according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but the remaining processing of steps S112 to S115 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S112 to S115 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S112, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S113, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S114, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 65, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from the state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S115, the process returns to step S112, and the processes of steps S112 to S115 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec).

First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board 67, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed and then an infinite loop is performed. Become. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is stored.

After that, random number update processing for lottery is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric role release counter C4, and the process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information was executed. Afterwards, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S203, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

After that, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred (step S205). In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred. In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to the various driving units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when information is set to switch the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state, the output of the drive signal to the general electric drive unit 34b is started to switch to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

After that, read processing is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

After that, ball entry detection processing is executed (step S209). In the ball entry detection process, signals received from the respective ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the reading results, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, and the first operating port 33 , the presence or absence of the ball entering the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. Details of the ball-entering detection process will be described later.

After that, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 (step S210). In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are collectively handled. may be configured.

After that, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed (step S211). In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is shot at 0.6 sec which is a predetermined shooting cycle. In the following step S212, as an input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

After that, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game round and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs in a situation where the number of reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, The numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the point of time is stored as reserved information in the reserved storage area 65a in chronological order. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, on the condition that the reservation information is not during the game rotation and the opening and closing execution mode and the reservation information is stored, it is determined whether or not the reservation information corresponds to the jackpot winning. processing, and when it corresponds to the winning of the jackpot, a distribution determination processing of deciding which jackpot result the reservation information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control processing, not only the winning judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing, but also if the holding information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, it is determined whether the holding information corresponds to reach occurrence Along with executing a reach determination process to determine, a process of selecting the duration of the game round using the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, a variation command containing information on the duration corresponding to the result of each process, and a type command containing information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a Start variable display. Upon receiving the variation command and the type command, the sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 to start the game play effect corresponding to the contents of these commands. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to start the variation display of the symbols corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game round is started.

In the special figure special electric control process, by determining whether or not the continuation period of the game round determined at the start of the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the game round. judge. When it is the end timing, a process for ending the game round is executed in a state in which the display corresponding to the game result is performed. In this case, when the current game cycle corresponds to the occurrence of any one of the jackpot results, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the special figure display part 37a, and the current game round is displayed. When the game round corresponds to the result of losing, the pattern corresponding to the result of losing is stopped and displayed in the special figure display part 37a. Also, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Upon receiving the final stop command, the sound emission control device 81 terminates the presentation for the current game round in the display emission section 53 and the speaker section 54 . Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the final stop command, the pattern display device 41 terminates the effect for the current game cycle.

In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game cycle corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the process for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of starting, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . Moreover, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, and when the round game is finished, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the closed state. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command that indicates that the round game is terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, when ending the opening/closing execution mode, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 . The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute the effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the open/close execution mode to the display control device 82 . The display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to execute the effects for the opening/closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening/closing execution mode. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated, the success/fail lottery mode and the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is terminated correspond to the type of the jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening/closing execution mode. Execute the process to become the mode.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the general figure general electric control process is performed (step S214). In the general map general electric control process, when the prize to the through gate 35 is generated, the processing for acquiring the reservation information on the general map side is executed, and when the reservation information on the general map side is stored Then, open determination is performed for the reservation information, and processing for performing the production for the normal map is performed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed. In this case, if the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. Further, when the opening/closing execution mode is selected, the low-frequency support mode is set even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

In the following step S215, based on the processing result of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, while setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information pertaining to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure pending display unit 37b , Set the output information for reflecting the increase/decrease number of the reservation information related to the normal map display unit 38a to the normal map reservation display unit 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a Set the output information for updating.

After that, the content of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 is confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S216). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Also, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

Next, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main side CPU 63 controls the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through hole. A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration for inputting detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a to the main side CPU 63. As shown in FIG.

The main side CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle 8 types of signals simultaneously. Areas for storing "0" or "1" information according to the voltage of each signal are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. In addition, although more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a, the number of signals to be input to the input port 63a is limited to eight types by the driver IC. Switched through switching control.

In the entering ball detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set to the signal group from each of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a setting, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special train detection sensor 45a. , the fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working opening detection sensor 46a, the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working opening detection sensor 47a, The 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a.

Each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a detects the passage of the game ball by outputting a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected. In this case, a HI level signal indicating that detection is in progress is output as a detection signal. When the input port 63a receives a LOW level signal, it stores "0" information in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HI level signal, stores "1" in the corresponding bit. store the information of In other words, in a situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, "0" information corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored in the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is stored. In the detected state, information of "1" corresponding to information indicating that detection is being performed is stored for the corresponding bit.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the entering ball detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the 0th bit D0 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a to the management IC 66. is a flag. The 10 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 10 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 10 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 10 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 10-ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the first bit D1 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S305), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S306). . The second output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored in the second bit D2 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S308), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S309). . The third output flag is for specifying that the main side CPU 63 should output information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the third bit D3 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, the special electric winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S311), the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S312), and further 1 is added to the value of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S313). The special electric prize flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game in the open/close execution mode. By confirming that the special electric prize flag is set to "1" in the special electric prize control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), entry of one game ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 is confirmed. It specifies that a ball has been generated, and subtracts 1 from the number of remaining balls that can enter the special electric prize winning device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the possible number of winning balls is executed, the special electric winning prize flag is cleared to "0". The fourth output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be output to the management IC 66. . The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times the payout of 15 game balls should be executed. When the value of the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and the 15 prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the 15 prize ball counter is subtracted by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 15 prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S315), and the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S316). Furthermore, the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the first operation opening 33 . In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), by confirming that the first operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the first operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to "0" do. The fifth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first operating opening detection sensor 46a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag. The one prize ball counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the counter for one prize ball is 1 or more, a one prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and a one prize ball command is output. When the command is output once, the value of the one prize ball counter is subtracted by one. When the payout control device 77 receives the one prize ball command, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

When it is confirmed that the state where information "0" is stored in the fifth bit D5 has changed to the state where information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S319), and the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S320). Furthermore, the value of the one-ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main side CPU 63 that one game ball has entered the second operation opening 34 . In the special figure special electric control processing (step S213) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to "1", it is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation storage area 65a On the condition that the number of pieces of pending information stored is less than four, which is the upper limit number, processing for newly storing pending information is executed. It is confirmed that "1" is set to the second operation winning flag in the special electric special electric control processing (step S213), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to "0". do. The sixth output flag is for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a should be output to the management IC 66. is a flag.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the sixth bit D6 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the outlet detecting sensor 48a. is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that information indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be output to the management IC 66. be.

When it is confirmed that the state in which information "0" is stored in the seventh bit D7 has changed to the state in which information "1" is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main side CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35 . By confirming that "1" is set to the gate winning prize flag in the general pattern general electric control processing (step S214) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8), the general general pattern stored in the general electric reservation area 65c On the condition that the number of pending information on the side is less than 4, which is the upper limit number, the processing of storing the numerical information of the current public electric utility item open counter C4 in the public power holding area 65c as the holding information on the public power map side. to run. It is confirmed that the gate winning flag is set to "1" in the general/universal electric power control processing (step S214), and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the gate winning flag is cleared to "0".

In addition, since the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as already explained, when one game ball detection sensor 42a to 49a starts detecting one game ball, In the situation where the detection sensors 42a to 49a continue to detect the one game ball, the main side CPU 63 identifies that one game ball has been detected by the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 49a. done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

Next, the contents of processing executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices communicating with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The payout control device 77 has an MPU 91 . The MPU 91 incorporates a payout side CPU 92, which is an arithmetic processing device including a control section and a calculation section, as well as a payout side ROM 93, a payout side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside to retain memory, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The payout side ROM 93 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the payout side CPU 92 .

The payout side RAM 94 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires external power supply for memory retention (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The payout-side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and has a faster read time than the payout-side ROM 93 when compared with the same data capacity. The payout side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout side ROM 93 .

The payout side CPU 92 can perform two-way communication with the main side CPU 63 . When the payout side CPU 92 receives the prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, it drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game balls can be paid out normally, and if it is specified that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally, the payout side RAM 94 To stop a payout device 76 even in a situation where unpaid prize ball number information is stored. Also, the payout side CPU 92 transmits to the main side CPU 63 a payout restriction command indicating that the payout cannot be performed normally. When the main side CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 notify that the game balls cannot be paid out normally. A notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81 so that A state in which the lower tray 56a is full of game balls, a no-ball state in which the tank 75 is not replenished with game balls, and a payout device 76 are states in which game balls cannot be normally dispensed. does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the game machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the tank is full when the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor, and the state in which the game balls are continuously detected by the full-tank detection sensor is cancelled. It specifies that the full tank state is canceled when the tank is full.

A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout-side CPU 92 identifies the state of no ball when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor is cancelled. Determine that the ballless state has been released.

The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting game balls paid out from the payout device 76 , and the detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when the game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout abnormal state occurs when the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor in spite of driving and controlling the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. , When the state in which the game balls are not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is canceled, it is specified that the abnormal payout state is canceled.

A front door open sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door open sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door open sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the dispensing side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. , the front door open sensor 95 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The dispensing side CPU 92 identifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closed detection signal from the front door open sensor 95, and when receiving the open detection signal from the front door open sensor 95. Identify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In addition, the dispensing side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is specified to have changed from the closed state to the open state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main side CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the open state when receiving the front door open command, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the front door closing command.

A main body open sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body open sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92 . In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body open sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body open sensor 96 transmits an open detection signal to the payout side CPU 92 . The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96, and determines that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the opening detection signal from the main body opening sensor 96. Identify that the main body 12 is in the open state. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the closed state to the open state, and specified that the game machine body 12 has changed from the open state to the closed state. A body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state when receiving the main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state when receiving the main body closing command.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

First, a full-tank process is executed (step S401). In the full-tank process, as already explained, based on the detection result of the full-tank detection sensor, it is specified whether the tank is full or not, and if the tank is full, processing for stopping the payout of game balls. is executed, and a command indicating that the tank is full is sent to the main side CPU 63 . In addition, when the full tank state is canceled, a process for making it possible to pay out game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

After that, a ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the no-ball processing, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor. While executing it, it transmits a command indicating that it is in the no-ball state to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the no-ball state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state has been canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the abnormal payout monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the abnormal payout state is present based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor, and if the abnormal payout state exists, the process of stopping the payout of game balls is executed. At the same time, it transmits to the main side CPU 63 a command indicating that the payout is in an abnormal state. Further, when the abnormal payout state is canceled, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a command indicating that the abnormal payout state is canceled is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, front door opening monitoring processing is executed (step S404). In the front door open monitoring process, as already explained, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open based on the detection result of the front door open sensor 95. If the front door frame 14 is open, A front door opening command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 while executing processing for stopping the payout of game balls. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, main body opening monitoring processing is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as already described, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96, and if the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, a game ball is detected. , and transmits a body opening command to the main side CPU 63 . Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process of enabling the payout of game balls is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main side CPU 63 .

Thereafter, command reading processing is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading the prize ball command transmitted by the main side CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. - 特許庁Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the undistributed prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), game balls are paid out by the payout device 76 Payout control processing for controlling the execution of is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the drive control of the payout device 76 is performed, and one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. When it does, 1 is subtracted from the value of prize ball number information. Then, when the value of the prize ball number information becomes "0", the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. After that, external information setting processing is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processing executed in this timer interrupt processing (step S409).

Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97 . The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, some of which are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some of which are A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92 . Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output

One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door open sensor 95 and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body open sensor 96 . More specifically, a signal relay board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU 92 . The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 directed from the front door open sensor 95 to the dispensing side CPU92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the front door. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97 . As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without going through the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

More specifically, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 branched from the signal path SL3 extending from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout side CPU 92 . The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal on the external terminal plate 97 for opening the main body. Therefore, an electric signal corresponding to the detection result of the body opening sensor 96 is input not only to the dispensing side CPU 92 but also to the external terminal for opening the body on the external terminal plate 97 . This makes it possible to externally output a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state to the hall computer HC without intervention of the control by the payout side CPU 92 .

Next, the contents of the information externally output to the hall computer HC from the main side CPU 63 and the payout side CPU 92 will be described. First, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

The main CPU 63 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8). As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the open/close execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that one game cycle has ended. Information indicating that, and a predetermined number (for example, 100) game balls from the game area PA through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 33, and information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34 are included. .

The payout side CPU 92 performs information output setting to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97 in the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). Information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal plate 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp the manner in which game balls are put out in the pachinko machine 10 according to various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97 . for example,
・Ball payout rate, which is the ratio of the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 until 100 game balls are discharged Ball rate (hereinafter referred to as "B")
・Ball output rate in open/close execution mode ・Ball output rate in high-frequency support mode "S")
・ BS x “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34”
・The number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
- The number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S2")
・B-(S1דNumber of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33”+S2דNumber of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34”)
etc. are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls means the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding ball entry portion.

<Structure for managing winning modes of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As already explained, the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 has a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65 and a management IC 66. FIG. The MPU 62 also has an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

The I/F 101 is an interface for transmitting and receiving signals to and from equipment outside the MPU 62 . The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 via the internal bus 103 . Through the input port of the I/F 101, detection results from sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, commands from the payout side CPU 92, etc. are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and command contents. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as already described. Further, when a signal is output to a device such as the drive unit 32b for a special electric as a result of execution of various processes by the main side CPU 63, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101, and the main side As a result of execution of various processes by the CPU 63 , when command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 , the command output is performed through the output port of the I/F 101 .

The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device, which is an external device of the pachinko machine 10, to the MPU 62, and is provided on the surface of the MPU 62 so that the terminal portion for connection is exposed. . However, as already explained, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main controller 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect a reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the board box 60a to expose the MPU 62. FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminals 102 . However, the invention is not limited to this, and an opening is formed in the substrate box 60a for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60. The configuration may be such that a reading device can be electrically connected to the terminal 102 .

The management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111 , a management side CPU 112 , a management side ROM 113 , a management side RAM 114 , an RTC 115 , a correspondence memory 116 , and a history memory 117 . These devices are connected through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66 so as to be bidirectionally communicable.

The management side I/F 111 receives various signals from the main side CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. It is an interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the terminal 102 for reading. Various signals from the main side CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I/F 111 , and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I/F 111 . The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a signal path group 120 for two-way communication built in the MPU 62 .

The management-side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management-side ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The management-side ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the management-side CPU 112 . The management-side RAM 114 is a memory such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside for storage (that is, volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the management-side ROM 113 when compared with the same data capacity. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113 .

The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is capable of constantly measuring date information and time information and outputting the measured date information and time information according to instructions from the management side CPU 112 . In addition, the RTC 115 is provided with a backup power supply, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

The correspondence memory 116 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. Correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between buffers 122a to 122p provided at input port 121 of management side I/F 111 and the types of signals input to buffers 122a to 122p. used for The details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

The history memory 117 is a memory such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory that does not require power supply from the outside (that is, non-volatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used to store information regarding the entry of game balls received from the main side CPU 63 through the management side I/F 111 . The details of the contents of history memory 117 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I/F 111 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. As shown in FIG.

The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a-122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through signal paths 118a to 118p. is at LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at HI level. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. A first signal of HI level is output for a specific period when a ball is detected. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the first signal of HI level is input to the first buffer 122a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the second signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and one game is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a second signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 122b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the third signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a, and one game is detected by the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a third signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the third signal of HI level is input to the third buffer 122c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level fourth signal when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. to output a fourth signal of HI level over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fourth signal of HI level is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, a HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a sixth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the sixth buffer 122f is receiving the HI level sixth signal.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level seventh signal in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. HI level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

The eighth buffer 122h receives an eighth signal corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in progress. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level eighth signal in the non-opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in the opening/closing execution mode.

The ninth buffer 122i receives a ninth signal corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is set.

A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continues to output the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and continues to output the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. and output.

An output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p to make the management side CPU 112 recognize the timing of outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102. FIG. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW-level output instruction signal when it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI-level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. do. This specified period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is being input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can receive signals from the main side CPU 63, but normal signals cannot be input in the pachinko machine 10. It is blank. In this way, as the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, the number of buffers 122a to 122p larger than the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It becomes possible to divert the management IC 66 to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 . Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond one-to-one to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the signal paths 118k to 118o are not formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked may be employed.

It is decided in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16th buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111, and the management side CPU 112 can specify that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . Details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the management side CPU 112 specifies the types of the various signals in a state where operating power is being supplied, The information stored in the correspondence memory 116 is referred to.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. As shown in FIG. The correspondence memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided at the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111. is provided.

In the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general prize winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the first correspondence area 123a, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 are displayed. Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 are displayed. Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c by the management side CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. Stored.

In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 123d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32 (15 pieces). Stored. Information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the fifth correspondence area 123e as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating that it is the first operating port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operating port 33 (one ) are also stored. Information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the sixth correspondence area 123f as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. FIG. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating that it is the second operating port 34 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operating port 34 (one ) are also stored. Information indicating the output port 24a is stored in the seventh correspondence area 123g as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g.

Information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h by the management CPU 112. FIG. Information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the types of signals input to the eleventh buffer 122k, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k. The twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management side CPU 112 . The thirteenth correspondence area 123m stores, as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of them. The fourteenth correspondence area 123n stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any of the signals input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as information for specifying the type of the signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n. The fifteenth correspondence area 123o stores information indicating that the signal is blank and does not correspond to any kind of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o.

As described above, the types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are specified by the management side CPU 112 upon receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. , the management IC 66 can be diverted to a model different from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

In addition, instead of outputting information for recognizing the type of signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the type of the signal is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management side CPU 112 based on the output information is stored in the correspondence memory 116. It is a configuration that As a result, compared to a configuration in which information for recognizing the type of the signal is output each time a signal corresponding to the storage of the history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, the signal is output each time. It is possible to suppress the amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

Information for specifying the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is output at the start of supply of operating power. As a result, when a game is started on the pachinko machine 10, the management side CPU 112 can specify the types of signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o.

Further, information setting for inputting the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed in the design stage of the management IC 66. FIG. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal to be reliably used not only in this pachinko machine 10 but also in other types of pachinko machines using the management IC 66. It is possible to omit the processing for Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be explained. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117. As shown in FIG.

The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set with serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information on a one-to-one basis. The history information storage area 125 can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing correspondence relationship information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10), First, date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the current pointer information to be written. After that, the correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relation memory 116, and the read correspondence relation information is stored in the area for storing the correspondence relation information of the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written.

More specifically, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116 store information corresponding to the types of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. More specifically, the information corresponding to the type of ball entry corresponding to each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, the first to third winning hole detection sensors 42a to 44a all detect game balls entering the general winning hole 31. Information indicating that each of the first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a is the general prize winning opening 31 is stored. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation opening 33. , the sixth correspondence area 123f stores information indicating the second operation port 34, and the seventh correspondence area 123g stores information indicating the out port 24a. If the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage are any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of ball-entering part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to the It is read out from any one of the seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, and the read information of the type of ball entering portion is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage area 125 as it is.

On the other hand, the eighth buffer 122h receives a signal indicating whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, the ninth buffer 122i receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and the tenth buffer 122j receives a signal indicating whether it is in the high frequency support mode. A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, information indicating the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and tenth correspondence area 123h stores information indicating the high frequency support mode. Information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level eighth signal in a situation other than the opening/closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the HI level eighth signal in a situation in the opening/closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and specifies that the opening/closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. becomes possible. When the eighth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence relationship information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the open/close execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information are stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information. When the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the opening/closing execution mode read out from the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area 125. Store in the area for storing the correspondence relationship information.

As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the HI level ninth signal when the high frequency support mode is set. , the management-side CPU 112 determines that the high-frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and terminates the high-frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that When the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence relation information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information is stored in the history information storage area. 125 is stored in an area for storing correspondence information.

As already explained, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is closed, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is open. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. can identify that the front door frame 14 is closed. When the tenth signal changes from LOW level to HI level and from HI level to LOW level, the management side CPU 112 is triggered to store correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. identify that That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 . Further, when the tenth signal changes from HI level to LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information is stored together with the history information. Stored in the area for storing correspondence relationship information in the area 125 .

The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the 10 business days in which game balls are continuously shot from the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It takes a few minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60,000 times a day, the history information storage area 125 for 600,000 or more pieces is provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and held in the history memory 117 for at least ten days.

The history memory 117 is provided with a pointer area 126 separately from the history area 124 . The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify the pointer information currently being written in the history memory 117 . Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer area 126 is set with information designating the pointer information of "0" to be written. Then, each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the pointer information of the last order is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information of the last order, the pointer information is set so that the pointer information of "0" is to be written. The information in the use area 126 is updated. As a result, when the number of pieces of history information that can be stored exceeds the number of pieces of history information that can be stored, and a trigger to store history information occurs, the history information storage area 125 in which the old piece of history information is stored is overwritten with new piece of history information in order. Become.

Further, when the history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reader, the history information storage area 125 is cleared to "0" and the pointer information of "0" is written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has been read once from being read again.

Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing recognition processing executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

First, "15" is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognition output counter counts the remaining required number of times of information output for making the management side CPU 112 recognize which type of signal each of the buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for specifying by the main side CPU 63 . Since fifteen buffers 122a to 122o of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to signal type recognition as already described, "15" is set in the recognition output counter.

Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 to make the management CPU 112 recognize which kind of signals the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. The first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used for this command output. That is, by using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) used to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store history information, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a A command is output to make the management side CPU 112 recognize which kind of signal 122o corresponds to. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which the signal paths for outputting the command are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. becomes possible and the configuration can be simplified. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the process of outputting the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been sent. Also, the period during which the identification start command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification start command, the management side CPU 112 is instructed to start processing for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals in the correspondence memory 116. Identify.

Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are corresponded so that the first buffer 122a is the target of signal type setting first, and then the n+1th buffer is the target of signal type setting after the nth buffer. Recognition setting of the signal type to be used is performed. Therefore, if the output counter for recognition is "15" to "13", the type identification command indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and the number of prize balls is read. read a type identification command indicating that it is the device 32 and the number of prize balls; if the output counter for recognition is "11", read out a type identification command indicating that it is the first operation port 33 and the number of prize balls; If the output counter for recognition is "10", it is the second working port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the output counter for recognition is "8", the type identification command indicating that the open/close execution mode is read. If the output counter for recognition is "7", it is the high-frequency support mode. If the output counter for recognition is "6", read the type identification command indicating that it is the front door frame 14. If the output counter for recognition is "5" to "1", it is blank. Read out the type identification command indicating that the

After that, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification type command output processing, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification type command so that the management side CPU 112 recognizes that a new command has been transmitted. Also, the period during which the identification type command output state and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these identification type command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification type command, the management side CPU 112 stores the corresponding identification type command in the correspondence area 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Stores information about

Thereafter, the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the decrement of 1 is "0" (step S506). When the value of the output counter for recognition is 1 or more (step S506: NO), processing for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the output counter for recognition after subtracting 1 is executed (steps S503 and step S504).

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S506: YES), output processing of an identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and each bit of data is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the identification end command output process, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification end command in order to make the management side CPU 112 recognize that a new command has been transmitted. Further, the period during which the identification end command and the output state of the ninth signal are maintained at HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. It is By receiving the identification end command, the management CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal types in the correspondence memory 116 has been completed. do.

Next, the management processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started. The processing speed of the management side CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main side CPU 63, and after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started in the main side CPU 63, the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is performed. is started, the combination of the processes after step S606 in the management process is executed 16 times or more.

When the identification start command is received from the main side CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffers 122a to 122o for which the type of signal is to be set. The signal type of the first buffer 122a is set first, and then the signal type of the (n+1)th buffer is set after the nth buffer.

Thereafter, on condition that the type identification command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 stores the type identification received this time. Stores the signal type information set in the command. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S605).

If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether or not an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and under the condition that the type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 Execute the process again.

If the identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of steps S607 and S608 are repeatedly executed. In step S607, a history setting process is executed for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117, details of which will be described later. In step S608, although the details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

FIG. 19 is a time chart showing how information on correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122o is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. FIG. 19(a) shows a period during which commands are output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h), and FIG. b) shows the period during which the output state of the ninth signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 19D shows the timing of execution of the correspondence setting process (step S604) by the management side CPU 112. FIG.

When the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 is started, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 19(a). be. At the timing t1, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at timing t2 when the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped by confirming the information of . In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management processing (FIG. 18) to enter the identification state. After that, at the timing of t3, the output of the identification start command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

Thereafter, at timing t4, output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started as shown in FIG. 19(a). At the timing t4, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By checking the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command has been received, the management CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 19(d). In the correspondence setting process, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information on the number of prize balls is stored in the first correspondence area 123 a of the correspondence memory 116 . After that, at timing t6, the output of the type identification command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

After that, at timing t7 to timing t9, timing t10 to timing t12, timing t13 to timing t15, and timing t16 to timing t18, similarly to timing t4 to timing t6, the main Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, the correspondence relationship setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed between timing t16 and timing t18.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. At the timing of t19, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from LOW level to HI level as shown in FIG. 19(b). After that, at the timing of t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from HI level to LOW level as shown in FIG. 19(b). By confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has changed from the HI level to the LOW level, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the command has been sent from the main side CPU 63, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h By confirming the information, the content of the command received from the main side CPU 63 is grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing t20 as shown in FIG. 19(c). After that, at the timing of t21, the output of the identification end command is stopped as shown in FIG. 19(a).

As described above, by using the ninth signal to allow the management side CPU 112 to recognize whether or not a command is being output, it is possible to instruct the management side CPU 112 to store the history information. Clearly to the management side CPU 112 that the command is being output even in a configuration in which the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) to be used. It is possible to recognize.

Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the management output process is executed at step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, "10" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The managed object counter identifies by the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a managed object that is not subject to the specification of whether or not to change the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 in the current management output process. In addition, it is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether the signal output state to the management side CPU 112 should be changed for any of the managed objects. In one management output process, the management targets for which the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to change the signal output state to the management CPU 112 are the seven ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, There are a total of 10 items including whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is executed, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened/closed. Therefore, the managed counter is first set to "10".

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management side CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S702). If it is not HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more. to 48a (step S703).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S704). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "10" and corresponds to the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", When the value of the managed counter is "9" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is determined. is "8" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "7". If it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", the value of the managed counter is "6", and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a , it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". If the sixth output flag is set to "1", and if the value of the managed counter is "4" and corresponds to the outlet 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " 1” is set. As already described, these first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10).

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed is set to "1" (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S705). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S706).

If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to HI level (step S707). Specifically, if the value of the managed counter is "3", it is determined whether or not the transition to the open/close execution mode has occurred. It is determined whether or not the transition to the frequency support mode has occurred, and when the value of the managed counter is "1", it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to HI level (step S708).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the counter to be managed to LOW level (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the managed object counter is 4 or more and the current managed object is any of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the managed object counter among the first to seventh signals It is determined whether or not a HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed after switching the output state of the corresponding signal from LOW level to HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 18) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This period allows the management CPU 112 to reliably identify the state. If the value of the managed object counter is "3" and the current managed object is in the open/close execution mode, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode has ended, and the value of the managed object counter is "2". When the current management object is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management object counter is "1", and the current management object is the front door frame 14. If so, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is closed. If there is an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to LOW level ( step S710).

If a negative determination is made in step S704, if the process of step S706 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S707, if the process of step S708 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S709, or step When the process of S710 is executed, the value of the managed counter in the main RAM 65 is decremented by 1 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S712). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the process after step S702 is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new value of the managed object counter.

Next, the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S803 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 . Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, if the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only the correspondence information but also the start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

When the value of the confirmation target counter is any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 by executing the writing process as described above , in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the combination of the relationship information indicating that it is either of the above is stored as history information. When the value of the check target counter is any of the open/close execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Then, the combination of the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and the start information is stored as history information.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 . If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as new pointer information to be written. When the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S802, or when the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level is checked in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value. It is determined whether or not correspondence information to be checked is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the current value of the check target counter is "8" to "10", the corresponding relationship areas 123h to 123j are filled with information indicating the open/close execution mode, Since either the information indicating that there is one or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from "1" to "0". It is determined whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from HI level to LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the write process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, not only the correspondence relationship information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the pointer information to be written corresponds to the pointer information. A history information storage area 125 stores, as history information, a combination of RTC information, correspondence information indicating any one of the opening/closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, and end information. state. After that, similar to step S805, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S810).

When a negative determination is made in step S806, when a negative determination is made in step S807, or when the process of step S810 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S812). When the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the process after step S802 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22(a) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22(b) shows a period in which a HI level signal is input to the eighth buffer 122h. 22(c) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 22(d) shows a period during which a HI level signal is input to the tenth buffer 122j. FIG. 22E shows the timing of writing history information to the history memory 117. FIG.

At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 22(a), the output state of the signal input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, the history information is written in the history memory 117 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 22(e). After that, at the timing of t2, the signal that was switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 22(a). However, since this signal is input to any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and the LOW level switching is not a target for storing history information, at the timing t2 in FIG. As shown in e), no history information is written.

After that, at each of timing t3, timing t5, timing t6, timing t9, timing t10, timing t13, and timing t14, as shown in FIG. 122g is switched from LOW level to HI level. Therefore, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG. 22(e).

As shown in FIG. 22(b), the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is HI level from timing t4 to timing t7. This eighth buffer 122h corresponds to whether or not the open/close execution mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t4 at which the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117 .

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is during the opening/closing execution mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into a hole is during the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is HI level from timing t8 to timing t11. This ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode is generated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t8 at which the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. As a result, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high-frequency support mode.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is included in the high frequency support mode. It is possible to distinguish whether or not In addition, since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into one is in the high-frequency support mode.

As shown in FIG. 22(d), the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is HI level from timing t12 to timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the timing t12 at which the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to HI level and the timing at which the output state of the signal switches to LOW level The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t15 includes end information. Accordingly, by checking the history information in the history memory 117, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

In addition, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of passage of time. Therefore, the history information indicating that a ball has entered one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 indicates that the front door frame 14 is open. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing or not. In addition, since the history information includes the RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 can be determined by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has been entered into one is during the opening of the front door frame 14 .

Next, a processing configuration for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing data output processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 has been received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading device is configured to output a connection signal when it is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated. In this case, the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 must be restarted in order to execute the data output process. Therefore, in order to output the history information to the outside, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since the power supply operation unit for stopping and starting the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, the outer frame 11 must be It is necessary to open the game machine main body 12 by pressing to expose the rear surface of the back pack unit 15.例文帳に追加Under these circumstances, in order to externally output the history information, it is necessary to start supplying operating power to the MPU 62 while the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for anyone other than the manager of the game hall to read the history information.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by determining whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102. (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to check both control information and history information, and if control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device will send the control information confirmation A signal is transmitted, and when the confirmation of history information is selected by manual operation of the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the reading device for checking the control information and the reading device for checking the history are separate may be employed. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming the control information is transmitted from the reading device, and a reading for history confirmation is sent to the reading terminal 102. When the device is electrically connected, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S902, output processing for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read as control information from the main ROM 64 and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether the control information is legitimate or normal. It is possible to do

If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management side CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from LOW level to HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the 16th buffer 122p is receiving the HI level output instruction signal. By switching the output state of the output instruction signal to the HI level, management-side CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. The processing will be described later in detail.

When the process of step S903 or the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it continues (step S905: YES), it waits in step S905. As a result, until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output processing is terminated.

Next, the external output processing executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 is switched from LOW level to HI level (step S1001: YES), the process for outputting the history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the outlet 24a is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that it is a general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the ball entering the general winning opening 31 is counted. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 that store correspondence information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the winning ball to the special electric prize winning device 32 is counted. The number is calculated (step S1004). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operation port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of incoming balls is calculated (step S1006).

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating that it is the front door frame 14 By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and the end information are stored, the out exit that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 was open 24a, the number of balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1007). In the history area 124 of the history memory 117, a history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are stored, and the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, in the entirety of the pointer information, which is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and start information is present, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored. All the history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as that in which the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in each of steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1002 and the number of entering balls at the out port 24a calculated in step S1007 is defined as the number of entering balls K1, and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entering balls calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 is defined as the number of entered balls K2, the difference between the number of entered balls calculated in step S1004 and the number of balls entered in the special electric winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 is defined as the number of entered balls K3, The difference between the number of entering balls calculated in step S1007 and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of entering balls K4, and the number of entering balls calculated in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of balls entering the second operating port 34 is defined as the number K5 of entering balls.
・ First parameter: Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K3 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the second operating port 34") / total number of game balls discharged from the skill area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) ratio (hereinafter referred to as this ratio "D1")
・Second parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K2 entering general winning hole 31/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) Ratio of the total number of game balls K3 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) Fourth parameter: total number of game balls K4 into the first operation port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D2")
· Fifth parameter: the ratio of the total number K5 of game balls entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D3")
・Sixth parameter: D1-(D2 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D3 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) After that, the oldest RTC information and the newest RTC information in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are used to extract all the history information to be calculated this time. Calculate the time (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . Also, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. FIG. As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads each piece of information to be output in the first output process.

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and the start information, the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the start information are stored. By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 that stores the end information, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 that occurred in the open/close execution mode , the number of balls entering each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1011). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the open/close execution mode and start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the open/close execution mode. is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 stores the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, and the correspondence information indicating the opening/closing execution mode and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence relationship information and start information indicating that the open/close execution mode is stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is not stored. If the history information storage area 125 does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the opening/closing execution mode are stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 that stores the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is treated as in the opening/closing execution mode.

After that, during the period of the opening and closing execution mode specified in step S1011, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33 and the The number of balls entering each of the second operating holes 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in step S1007, except that the period of the open/close execution mode specified in step S1011 is assumed.

After that, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1011 and S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1011 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1012 is defined as the number of balls entering K11, and the number of balls entering the general winning hole 31 calculated in step S1011. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K12, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1012 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1011. The difference between the number of balls entered in 32 is defined as the number of balls entered K13, and the difference between the number of balls entered through the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entered through the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1011 is the number of balls entered. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1012 and the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entering balls K14.
11th parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K13 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
・Twelfth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K12 entering general winning port 31/total number of game balls ejected from game area PA (K11+K12+K13+K14+K15) The ratio of the total number of game balls K13 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) 14th parameter: The total number of game balls K14 into the first operation port 33 / discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D12")
· Fifteenth parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K15 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D13")
16th parameter: D11-(D12 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D13 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
17th parameter: (K13 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K15 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K12 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K13 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Second operation opening 34" 18th parameter: K13 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32'' / Total number of game balls paid out (K12 x ``For winning to general winning port 31 "Number of prize balls" + K13 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K14 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K15 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) After that, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

After that, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information, and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode By referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in the period between the history information storage area 125 in which the information and end information are stored, the out exit 24a that occurred in the high-frequency support mode, general The number of balls entering each of the winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1015). A history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information indicating the high-frequency support mode and The period between the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125 . In addition, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence relationship information indicating the high-frequency support mode and the start information and the correspondence relationship indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored in the entirety of the consecutively numbered pointer information. If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the total number of hits for the sections is calculated. Also, although there is a history information storage area 125 that stores correspondence relationship information indicating that the high-frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 is present. If the history information storage area 125 in which is stored does not store the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-frequency support mode, the correspondence information and the start information indicating the high-frequency support mode are stored. Any of the history information in the history information storage area 125 that stores RTC information corresponding to a time after the history information storage area 125 that is set is treated as that in the high-frequency support mode.

After that, during the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 generated in the state where the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered into each of the second working openings 34 (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of hits is the same as in step S1007, except that the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1015 and S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of entering balls generated while the front door frame 14 is open calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of entering balls calculated in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using each number of hit balls after the subtraction. The difference between the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1015 and the number of balls entering the out hole 24a calculated in step S1016 is defined as the number of balls entering K21. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning port 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number of entered balls K22, and the special electric prize winning device calculated in step S1016 relative to the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1015. 32 is defined as the number of balls entered, and the difference between the number of balls entered through the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entered through the first working hole 33 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of balls entered into the ball K23. The difference between the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1016 and the number of balls entering the second working port 34 calculated in step S1015 is defined as the number of entering balls K24.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 x "number of prize balls for winning to general winning opening 31" + K23 x "number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K24 x "first operation opening 33 The ratio of the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) (hereafter, this ratio is referred to as " D11”)
22nd parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 K22/total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21+K22+K23+K24+K25) 24th parameter: total number of game balls K24/discharged from the game area PA Percentage of the total number of game balls (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this percentage is referred to as "D22")
· 25th parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K25 entering the second operation port 34 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "D23")
26th parameter: D21-(D22 x "number of prize balls for winning to first operating port 33" + D23 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operating port 34")
After that, the third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . After that, clear processing is executed (step S1019). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the game ball is paid out when the game ball enters one of the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, the player can enter one of these ball entering parts The game is played while expecting that the game ball will enter the ball. In this configuration, the entry of a game ball into any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as the history target ball entering section) occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 . As a result, it becomes possible for the pachinko machine 10 to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering portion or the frequency of entering the ball, and the managed information is used. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the manner in which a game ball enters each history target ball entering section. Further, since the history information is stored and held by the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the history information.

All the ball-entering units that discharge game balls from the game area PA are subject to execution of history information storage processing and subject to management using history information. This makes it possible to manage the ball-entering frequency for any history-targeted club by using the history information. In addition, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target ball entering portion to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using the history information.

The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball entered the history target ball entry portion, which triggered the storage of the history information. Thus, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game ball into the history target ball entry section.

The history memory 117 stores not only the history information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the history target ball entry portion, but also the history information indicating whether or not the open/close execution mode is in progress, and whether the high frequency support mode is in progress. and history information indicating whether the front door frame 14 is open. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between each of these situations and manage the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entering section.

It is possible to output the history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device, which is a device outside the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, it is possible to read the history information with the reading device and analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target ball entry portion using the read history information.

A reading terminal 102 is provided in the MPU 62 , and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to check whether the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. This makes it possible to externally output the history information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Either the program or the history information is specified as the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 , and the information on the side corresponding to the specified result is externally output through the reading terminal 102 . As a result, in the configuration in which the history information is externally output using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program, the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the information to be externally output is either the program or the history information. is specified on the side, and the specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, even if the reading terminal 102 is also used, only necessary information can be read.

Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is program information or history information. This makes it possible to avoid complicating the configuration regarding the selection of information to be externally output.

An MPU 62 having a main-side ROM 64 for storing programs in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to concentrate the signal paths for the reading terminal 102 within the MPU 62 . Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while making unauthorized access to the signal path to the reading terminal 102 difficult.

A main side CPU 63 that executes a process for paying out a game ball based on the entry of the game ball into one of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34. Separately, a management side CPU 112 is provided, and the management side CPU 112 executes processing for storing the history information in the history memory 117 . As a result, it becomes possible to manage the manner of entry of game balls into the respective history object entry sections while preventing the processing load of the main side CPU 63 from excessively increasing.

The main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 are provided on the same chip as the MPU 62 . This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 .

The main side CPU 63 stores the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a in each buffer of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using the signal paths corresponding to the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. 122a-122g. As a result, the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 correspond to the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, the signal paths), thereby simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management CPU 112. It becomes possible to

The main CPU 63 has information corresponding to whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is being opened. are transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using signal paths corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the respective signal paths), thereby simplifying the configuration for distinguishing the types of information in the management side CPU 112. becomes possible.

The master side CPU 63 transmits to the management side CPU 112 correspondence relation information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to. This eliminates the need to store the correspondence information in advance in the management IC 66 . Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, the management IC 66 can specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the main side CPU 63 and the history target ball entry section. It is possible to make it

Using the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry portion, the correspondence information is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66. This makes it possible to simplify the communication configuration compared to a configuration in which a dedicated signal path is provided for transmitting correspondence information.

The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116 , and the correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116 . As a result, every time the main side CPU 63 transmits the information of the detection result of each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, the information that enables the management IC 66 to specify the history target ball entry portion corresponding to the information to be transmitted. no longer need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main side CPU 63. FIG.

Information output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102 is performed by switching the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 from the LOW level to the HI level. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management side CPU 112 without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. . This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to the transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

The management IC 66 is provided with buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63, the number of which is greater than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. It is As a result, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, it is possible to improve the versatility of the management IC 66 .

When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, each piece of history information includes correspondence information indicating the type of the history target ball-entering club corresponding to the history information. As a result, it is possible to specify the entry mode of the game ball into each history target ball entry section by using the read history information.

By using the history information stored in the history memory 117 in the management IC 66, various parameters (first to eighth, eleventh to eighteenth, 21-26 parameters) are calculated. As a result, it is possible to externally output various parameters that are results of calculation using history information.

Various parameters are calculated while excluding the history information corresponding to the situation in which the front door frame 14 is being opened. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Further, various parameters corresponding to each of the conditions of the open/close execution mode and the condition of the high-frequency support mode are calculated. As a result, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball according to each situation.

When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clearing process of the history memory 117 . As a result, history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 is to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should be stored and held is erased by overwriting. It is possible to make it difficult to generate

When outputting various parameters to the reading terminal 102 , history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, when various parameters are read out to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA, it is possible to refer not only to the various parameters but also to the history information that is the basis for calculating the various parameters.

The management side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of calculating various parameters.

When the main CPU 63 identifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and the main CPU 63 transmits output instruction information, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters. , and various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified in the process executed by the main CPU 63 when the supply of operating power is started, and the reading device is electrically connected. is specified, information of an output instruction is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . As a result, in a situation where the main CPU 63 or the like is executing a process for starting supply of operating power, that is, in a situation before the main CPU 63 starts a normal process for advancing the game, various The calculation of the parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where a game ball may enter the history target ball entry section, thereby reducing the processing load of the management IC 66. can be reduced.

History information is stored in the history memory 117 in a configuration in which an external output corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is performed through the external terminal plate 97. . As a result, by using the information output to the outside through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the history target ball entering section and the frequency of entering the ball.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111, the type of the input signal is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66. It differs from the first embodiment. Also, the configuration of processing executed by the main CPU 63 to allow the management CPU 112 to specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i, Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, these signals are input to different buffers. Specifically, the signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as the opening/closing execution mode signal, and the signal corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as the high-frequency support mode signal. , the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

The thirteenth buffer 122m receives an open/close execution mode signal, the fourteenth buffer 122n receives a high-frequency support mode signal, the fifteenth buffer 122o receives a door open signal, and the The input of the output instruction signal to the 16 buffers 122p is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 can be configured to input these 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p without receiving instructions from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that each of the above-mentioned signals corresponding to each is input to. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 . Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

First, "12", which is the number of the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l whose signal types are to be recognized, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1101). After that, an identification start signal output process is executed (step S1102). In the output process, the output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification start signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

After that, the output frequency information corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read output frequency information is set in the output frequency counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( step S1103). The output number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is output by the main CPU 63 .

In the present embodiment, when the management side CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of prize balls set for the ball-entering section corresponding to the types of signals is determined. Outputs the type identification signal the same number of times as The management side CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times the type identification signal is received for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l are grasped as the number of prize balls set for the ball entry portion corresponding to the types of the signals.

In step S1103, when the value of the output counter for recognition is one of "12", "11" and "10", "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning hole 31 is set in the output number counter. . Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "9", "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "8", "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "7", "1" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "6", even if the game ball enters the out port 24a corresponding to the out port 24a, the game ball is not paid out. is set to "0". Also, if the value of the recognition output counter is any one of "5" to "1", the corresponding ball-entering portion does not exist and is blank, so the output count counter is set to "0".

After that, output processing of a start opportunity signal is executed (step S1104). In the output process, by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to HI level, the output of the start trigger signal is started. The period during which the first signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

After that, on the condition that the value of the output counter of the main RAM 65 is not "0" (step S1105: YES), that is, on the condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output counter in step S1103, The process advances to step S1106. In step S1106, output processing of a type identification signal is executed. In the output process, by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to HI level, output of the type identification signal is started. The period during which the second signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S1108). If the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

When the affirmative determination is made in step S1105, or when the affirmative determination is made in step S1108, output processing of an end trigger signal is executed (step S1109). In the output process, by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to HI level, the output of the termination trigger signal is started. The period during which the third signal is maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1110), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103 to execute processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after subtracting 1. do.

On the other hand, when the value of the output counter for recognition is "0" (step S1111: YES), output processing of an identification end signal is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open/close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is set to HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period during which these signals are maintained at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

Next, the management processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is started as in the first embodiment.

When the reception of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 is cleared to "0" (step S1202). After that, on condition that a start trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S<b>1204 , it is determined whether or not a type identification signal has been received from the main CPU 63 . If the type identification signal has been received (step S1204: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1205). The reception number counter is a counter for specifying the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main side CPU 63 by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

When a negative determination is made in step S1204, or when the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether or not an end trigger signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the termination trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204, and if the termination trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence relationship setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, among the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116, the correspondence area corresponding to the current value of the counter to be set in the management side RAM 114 is set in the reception counter. Stores the value that is specified. In this case, the first correspondence area 123a, the second correspondence area 123b, and the third correspondence area 123c are set with "10" corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31, and the fourth correspondence area 123d is set with is set to "15" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation opening 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence "1" corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second operation opening 34 is set in the area 123f. Also, "0" is set in the seventh to twelfth correspondence areas 123g to 123l. After that, 1 is added to the setting target counter value of the management side RAM 114 (step S1208).

When a negative determination is made in step S1203, or when the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal has not ended (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on the condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the processes after step S1204 are executed. Execute. If the identification end signal has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S1209: YES), the history setting process in step S1210 and the external output process in step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing how information on the correspondence between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l is stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 28(a) shows the period during which the output state of the first signal is HI level, FIG. 28(b) shows the period during which the output state of the second signal is HI level, and FIG. ) shows the period during which the output state of the third signal is at HI level, FIG. 28(d) shows the period during which the output state of the open/close execution mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 28(f) shows the period during which the output state of the high-frequency support mode signal is at HI level, and FIG. FIG. 28(g) shows the timing for adding 1 to the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114, and FIG. The timing at which the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process (step S1207) is shown.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. , the open/close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. As a result, output of an identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is started. After that, at timing t2, the output states of the first signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from HI level to LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification start signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management processing (FIG. 27), thereby entering the identification state as shown in FIG. 28(f).

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at HI level as shown in FIG. 28(a) from timing t3 to timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(b) from timing t5 to timing t7. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG. 28(g).

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(c) from timing t8 to timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t9, the management-side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. 28(h). Since the value of the reception count counter is "1" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, "1" is set as the correspondence information in the correspondence areas 123a to 123l to be set this time in the correspondence memory 116. ” information.

Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28(a) from timing t11 to timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . Then, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the second timing is shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output to the management side CPU 112 once. In this case, the value of the reception count counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 at each of timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, and timing t23, as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level from timing t25 to timing t27, as shown in FIG. 28(c). As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management side CPU 112 . In this case, at timing t26, as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception count counter is "10" at the timing when the correspondence setting process is executed, the correspondence information "10 ” information.

After that, at the timing of t28, as shown in FIGS. 28(c), 28(d) and 28(e), the output states of the third signal, the opening/closing execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are LOW. level to HI level. As a result, output of an identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. After that, at the timing of t29, the output states of the third signal, the open/close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the HI level to the LOW level. As a result, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 27), thereby canceling the identification state as shown in FIG. 28(f).

In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes the prize balls corresponding to the entering ball section that triggered the storage of the history information. Information on the number is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, if there are a plurality of types of ball-entering parts with the same number of winning balls, the history information cannot distinguish between the ball-entering parts. Specifically, since the number of winning balls is one for each of the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34, it is possible to distinguish between the first working opening 33 and the second working opening 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls may be different between the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 . This makes it possible to distinguish between the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information even with the configuration in which the history information is stored as in the second embodiment.

Further, in this embodiment, "15" is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are subject to confirmation.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal, but also information corresponding to whether the open/close execution mode is in effect, information corresponding to whether the high-frequency support mode is in effect, and the front door As for the information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to this information without receiving the correspondence relation information from the main side CPU 63. It's becoming In this case, only the information corresponding to the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a-48a is the information that requires the main side CPU 63 to recognize the correspondence relationship between each information and each signal path 118a-118g to the management side CPU 112. Become. When the management side CPU 112 recognizes the correspondence information, pulse signals of the same number as the number of prize balls corresponding to the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 using the second signal. output to This makes it possible to simplify the configuration regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the trigger for executing various parameter calculations using history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment. These functions are the same as those of the first embodiment.

The management IC 66 is also provided with a calculation result memory 131 in addition to the above. In this embodiment, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time when a calculation trigger occurs, as will be described in detail later. Then, the calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131 . Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 .

Calculation triggers for various parameters occur before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . This makes it possible to differentiate the timing of calculating various parameters from the timing of externally outputting them to the reading device, making it possible to distribute the processing load.

In addition, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing the calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger, but also various parameters for multiple calculation triggers can be stored together. It is possible to store. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation trigger.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. 2 signals are input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is inputted to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is inputted to the sixth buffer 122f. A sixth signal is input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, a signal corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h, and a ninth buffer is input. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

In this embodiment, in addition to the various signals described above, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main side CPU 63 to provide the management side CPU 112 with a trigger for calculating various parameters. The input of the calculation instruction signal to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, similarly to the input of the output instruction signal to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management side CPU 112 can specify that the corresponding signals are input to the 15th to 16th buffers 122o to 122p without receiving the signals. On the other hand, the types of signals to be input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n are not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals are instructed by the main CPU 63. Thus, it is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

Next, a processing configuration for executing calculation of various parameters by the management CPU 112 in response to occurrence of a calculation trigger will be described. FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing power failure information storage processing executed by the main CPU 63 . The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

In the power failure information storage process, when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1302). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level. Thereafter, after the power failure processing is executed in step S1303, an infinite loop is entered and the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure processing, the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1", the checksum is calculated, and the calculated checksum is saved.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The power failure handling process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

In the power failure handling process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is HI level (step S1401: YES), in steps S1402 to S1406, the external output in the first embodiment Similar to steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), the number of balls entering each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . Further, in step S1407, similarly to step S1007 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated while the front door frame 14 is open. In step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the process for external output (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The total time is calculated in the same manner as in step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24). Then, information on the calculation result of step S1408 and information on the calculation result of step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

Thereafter, in step S1411, similarly to step S1011 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various types of balls entered during the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, and in step S1412, the first Similar to step S1012 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the embodiment, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S1414 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131 . Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, in step S1415, similarly to step S1015 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of hit balls in the high-frequency support mode is calculated, and in step S1416, the above-described Similar to step S1016 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in Embodiment 1, the numbers of various types of incoming balls are calculated in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is on and the front door frame 14 is open. Also, in step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, information on the calculation result of step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131 . Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds. After that, an infinite loop is established, and the operation waits until the supply of operating power to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing an external output process executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1501: YES), output processing of the calculation result is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . In this case, if only the various computation results corresponding to one occurrence of the computation trigger are stored in the computation result memory 131, only the various computation results corresponding to the one occurrence of the computation trigger will be read by the reader. When the memory 131 for operation results is read and various operation results corresponding to the occurrence of multiple operation triggers are stored, the various operation results corresponding to the multiple occurrences of the operation trigger are read by the reading device. .

Thereafter, history information output processing is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, various pieces of history information stored in the history area 124 are read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 . By outputting not only the various calculation results but also the history information in this way, it is possible for the operator using the reader to perform detailed analysis of the various calculation results.

After that, clear processing is executed (step S1504). In the clearing process, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, in the clearing process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to "0". As a result, the computation result memory 131 is initialized.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

When the main CPU 63 determines that the supply of operating power is stopped, the output state of the calculation instruction signal is changed to HI level, whereby the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on instructions from the main side CPU 63 .

Various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 are sequentially written to the calculation result memory 131 . As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and when the various parameters are read by a reading device, the various parameters can be collectively read out for a plurality of business days.

When various parameters are written into the computation result memory 131, information that enables identification of when the various parameters were computed is written into the computation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. This makes it possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters were calculated.

It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to "0" when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the trigger are written to the calculation result memory 131 . This makes it difficult for new history information to be written into history memory 117 when the maximum number of history information that can be stored has already been stored in history memory 117 .

Further, the information to be externally output to the reading device may be only the information of various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be externally output. . This makes it possible to suppress the amount of information to be output to the outside.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure handling process executed by the management side CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing power failure handling processing executed by the management side CPU 112 in this embodiment.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In the various calculation processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within the reference range (step S1603). in particular,
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34" 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x ``For winning to general winning port 31 "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) are set as parameters to be determined as to whether or not they are within the reference range. Then, if the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S1603.

Note that the predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as predetermined parameters. for example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number K2 of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 / the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA (K1+K2+K3+K4+K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, it may be determined that the predetermined parameter is within the reference range. Alternatively, only predetermined parameters to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated in various calculation processes in step S1602.

If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

On the other hand, if the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131 when the predetermined parameters are not within the reference range. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, the history is left in the calculation result memory 131, and the storage capacity required for the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, or if the process of step S1604 is executed, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S1605). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After the processing of step S1605 is executed, an infinite loop is entered and the operation power supply to the management side CPU 112 is completely stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the contents of various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined not to be included in the reference range are stored in the calculation result memory 131. is written to As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced, and the required storage capacity of the calculation result memory 131 can be reduced.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters. The configuration that is different from the third embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 35(a) is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main side CPU 63. FIG. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). When an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, addition processing of the incoming ball counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is management output process (FIG. 20), based on the number of times step S705 is executed. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S1703). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S1703: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, output processing of the calculation instruction signal is executed (step S1705). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

FIG. 35(b) is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the calculation process is a process executed instead of the power failure handling process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the arithmetic processing is configured to be executed after the external output processing in the management processing (FIG. 18). The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the arithmetic process are repeatedly executed in this order.

When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described fifth embodiment in the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters. The configuration that is different from the fifth embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the trigger specifying process executed by the main CPU 63. As shown in FIG. Note that the trigger specifying process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, 1 is added to the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1902). The continuation counter counts the period during which a game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying in .

If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S1904). If the state in which the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 continues for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set so that The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main CPU 63 should measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. is "0", the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is "1", the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the time measurement flag is set to "1" (step S1905).

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, if the process of step S1904 is executed, or if the process of step S1905 is executed, the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" ( Step S1906: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used to measure the time for specifying the timing of switching the output state of the operation instruction signal to HI level.

It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the instruction reference value (step S1908). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to "0" (step S1909), and an operation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output processing, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 is maintained at HI level over a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at HI level.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, since various parameters are calculated each time a predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of various parameters simply by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped when the game is not executed, and the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop when the game is started. As a result, it becomes possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being executed from the calculation target of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive the various parameters in the situation in which the game is being executed.

Note that the RTC 115 may be used to measure whether or not the predetermined period has elapsed, instead of using the measurement counter.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the calculation trigger that causes the management side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters is different from that in the above-described first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. It is performed independently by the management side CPU 112 instead of . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the arithmetic processing is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting processing (FIG. 21).

Corresponds to the occurrence of a game ball entering any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of this processing time. It is determined whether or not the history information to be processed is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, addition processing of the entering ball counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is is specified based on the number of times the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball's entry is stored in the history setting process. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entering ball counter.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number of "500" (step S2003). If it is equal to or greater than "500" (step S2003: YES), subtraction processing of the incoming ball counter in the main side RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, "500" is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter. After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2005). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA becomes equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 . In this case, since various parameters are calculated each time a calculation trigger that occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the main side CPU 63, a game ball enters the game area PA within the range of one business day. It is possible to finely manage the mode.

In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, various parameters are calculated on the condition that the game is being executed. is calculated. As a result, it is possible to prevent meaningless calculation of various parameters in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

Further, the total number of game balls ejected from the game area PA is measured by the management side CPU 112, and the management side CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number. In other words, the management side CPU 112 independently determines the calculation timing of various parameters. As a result, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced because it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute the processing for determining the trigger for calculating various parameters.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 (see FIG. 29) as in the third embodiment. When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation results into the calculation result memory 131 . Further, in the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, and a high-frequency support mode. A signal indicating completion, a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has been completed are individually sent from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 . sent to.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In this embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that it corresponds to one of the ball-entering sections. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high-frequency support mode is stored in the tenth correspondence area 123j. The eleventh correspondence area 123k stores information corresponding to the end of the high-frequency support mode, and the twelfth correspondence area 123l stores information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14. , information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored in the 13th correspondence area 123m. Therefore, in step S2101, "13" is set to the check target counter.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level (step S2102). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "10", the tenth buffer 122j is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, write processing to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 124 to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117, and the pointer information corresponding to the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. FIG. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the read target of the correspondence information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is "10", the correspondence information is read from the tenth correspondence area 123j, and if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e is the correspondence It becomes a target for reading information.

After that, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and 1 is added to the numerical information. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In the various calculation processes, the same processes as steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, state information transfer processing is executed (step S2109). In the takeover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, it is determined whether the current state is the opening/closing execution mode, whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. It is determined whether or not. Then, the status information is written in the management side RAM 114 .

After that, the clearing process of the history memory 117 is executed (step S2110). In the clear processing, the history information storage area 125 of the history memory 117 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 126 is cleared to "0". As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Also, after executing the clear processing, the state information written in the management side RAM 114 in step S2109 is read. Then, if the state information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored, the history information indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is being executed is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. While writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. Also, when the state information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is on is stored, the history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is on is written. 125 and adds 1 to the pointer information to be written. Further, when the state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, the history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written.

When a negative determination is made in step S2102, when a negative determination is made in step S2106, or when the process of step S2110 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is subtracted by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2112). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the process after step S2102 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of pieces of history information exceeds the upper limit that can be stored in the history memory 117, and the various parameters cannot be calculated accurately.

Also, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information, which has already been the object of calculation of various parameters, from being the object of calculation of various parameters again.

Moreover, even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the status information transfer process is executed. This makes it possible to appropriately manage the state information.

<Ninth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141 , a first status area 142 , a second status area 143 and a third status area 144 . Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the areas 141 to 144, respectively. The second counters 141b to 144b of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 141c to 144c of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 141d to 144d of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 141e to 144e of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 141f to 144f of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 141g to 144g of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from LOW level to HI level. The eighth counters 141h to 144h of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from LOW level to HI level. The ninth counters 141i to 144i of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from LOW level to HI level. The tenth counters 141j to 144j of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from LOW level to HI level. The twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from LOW level to HI level. The thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th counters 141n to 144n of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth counters 141o to 144o of the areas 141 to 144 store information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is changed from LOW level to HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the outlet 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operation 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the results of ball entry into either the port 33 or the second operating port 34 are input. Therefore, eighth to eighth signals corresponding to state information such as whether the open/close execution mode is on, whether the high-frequency support mode is on, and whether the front door frame 14 is open. 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing history setting processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 .

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than the information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j, so in step S2201 "10" is set in the check target counter. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counters are buffers to which status information signals are input (step S2202). Specifically, information indicating the opening/closing execution mode, information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and It is determined whether or not any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, a state information setting process is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the information of the first state indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress is sent to the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal switches from HI level to LOW level, the information of the first state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, the second state information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is stored in the management side RAM 111 . , and when the output state of the ninth signal switches from HI level to LOW level, the information of the second state is erased from the management side RAM 114 . Further, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, third state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is being opened. is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and the third state information is erased from the management-side RAM 114 when the output state of the tenth signal switches from the HI level to the LOW level.

If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the data is stored in one of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, which corresponds to the current value of the check target counter and receives a signal of information different from the status information. By confirming whether or not the numerical information stored has been changed from "0" to "1", whether the output state of the input signal from the main side CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from LOW level to HI level. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, addition processing of the corresponding total counter is executed (step S2205). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth total counters 141 a to 141 o in the total area 141 of the history memory 117 . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is "5", the fifth total counter 141e is subject to addition, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is "1", the first total counter 141a is subject to addition. .

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening/closing execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 142e for the first state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first state counter 142a is Subject to addition.

Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding counter for the second state is added (step S2209). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 143e for the second state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 143a for the second state is Subject to addition.

After that, by referring to the state information of the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding counter for the third state is added (step S2211). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the value of the current check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the area 144 for the third state of the history memory 117. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is "5", the fifth counter 144e for the third state is subject to addition, and if the value of the check target counter is "1", the first counter 144a for the third state is Subject to addition.

If the process of step S2203 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, if a negative determination is made in step S2210, or if the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the confirmation target counter in the management-side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtract (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2213). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the process after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

In this way, by storing information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment, the output port 24a such as step S1002 is stored. A process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the game balls, a process of calculating the number of game balls entered into the special electric winning device 32 such as step S1004, and a process of calculating the number of game balls entering the first operation opening 33 such as step S1005. The calculation process and the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34, such as step S1006, are not required. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

In the process of calculating the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31, such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c 31, it is necessary to perform a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Further, the number of balls that occur in the open/close execution mode and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls that occur in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment. Similarly, it is impossible to distinguish the number of balls that occurred in the high-frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 being opened from the number of balls that occurred in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the storage means for storing history information. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in this embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117 unlike the first embodiment. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence memory 116, and the history memory 117, history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main side RAM65. In other words, the main RAM 65, which temporarily stores the information necessary for executing the program in the main CPU 63, is also used as a memory for storing the ball entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I/F 111. When an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the ball entry history. Various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131 . When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, while various parameters are provided to the reading device from the calculation result memory 131, the entry history stored in the main side RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process in this embodiment executed by the main side CPU 63 . Note that the ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

When it is confirmed that the state where the information "0" is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the state where the information "1" is stored, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 as a history of winning balls. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the general winning counter is maintained even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main side RAM 65 (step S2303).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the first bit D1 is switched to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second winning hole detection sensor 43a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2305). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2306).

When it is confirmed that the second bit D2 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the third winning hole detection sensor 44a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 (step S2308). After that, 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2309).

When it is confirmed that the state where the information of "0" is stored for the third bit D3 is switched to the state where the information of "1" is stored, one game is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, "1" is set to the special electric winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S2311). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2312). The special electric prize counter is a counter for storing the number of winning balls to the special electric prize winning device 32 as a history of winning balls. The value of the special electric winning counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in a power-off state, the value of the special electric winning counter is stored in memory. After that, 1 is added to the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main side RAM 65 (step S2313).

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the fourth bit D4 has changed to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the first operation opening detection sensor 46a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2315). Also, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2316). The first actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the first actuation opening 33 as the entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the first operation counter is is stored. Then, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S2317).

When it is confirmed that the fifth bit D5 has changed from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the second operating opening detection sensor 47a detects 1. It is determined that game balls are detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2319). Also, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2320). The second actuation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the second actuation opening 34 as the entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the second operation counter is stored. Then, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S2321).

When it is confirmed that the sixth bit D6 changes from the state in which the information "0" is stored to the state in which the information "1" is stored, the outlet detection sensor 48a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the out port 24a as a history of entered balls. The value of the out counter is cleared to "0" when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since backup power is supplied to the main side RAM 65 even when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. retained.

When it is confirmed that the state in which the information "0" is stored for the seventh bit D7 is switched to the state in which the information "1" is stored, one game is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that a ball has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S2325).

By executing the ball-entering detection process as described above, the ball-entering history to the out-port 24a, the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is recorded in each ball-entering portion. It is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters one of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112. No output is required. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration for outputting a signal from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 .

In this embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management side CPU 112 reads out the number of balls entering the general winning opening 31 from the general winning counter of the main side RAM 65, reading the number of balls entering, reading the number of balls entering the first working port 33 from the first operation counter of the main side RAM 65, reading the number of balls entering the second working port 34 from the second operation counter of the main side RAM 65, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read out from the out counter of the main side RAM 65 . Then, the first to eighth parameters explained in the first embodiment are calculated by using the read numbers of entering balls. However, the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of incoming balls when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured separately. Therefore, the first to eighth parameters are calculated while including the number of balls that occur when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, since the number of hit balls in the open/close execution mode and the number of hit balls in the high-frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first to eighteenth and twenty-first parameters described in the first embodiment are to the 26th parameter are not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131 . Then, when the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all the parameters written in the calculation result memory 131 at that time are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to "0".

Instead of the management IC 66 independently accessing the main RAM 65, the information on the number of hits stored in the main RAM 65 as the history of hits is transmitted to the management IC 66 under transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112, and the method of storing the ball entry history to each ball entry section. ing. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in this embodiment. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I/F 101 and a reading terminal 102, as in the first embodiment. The management IC 66 is provided with a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, a correspondence memory 116, and a history memory 117, as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. again. In addition to the MPU 62 , the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting section 151 . The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63 . The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and uses information on the history of ball entry into each ball-entering section read out from the history memory 117 to calculate various parameters. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the calculated various parameters. The notification light emitting portion 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the board box 60a of the main control device 60. The board box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting portion 151 can be seen from the outside of the board box 60a. A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided so that visual confirmation can be made from the outside. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11 so that the main controller 60 can be visually confirmed. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management side I/F 111 in this embodiment.

The same types of signals as in the first embodiment are input to the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p. Specifically, a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and a second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is inputted to the second buffer 122b. A signal is input, a third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. is input, a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working opening detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working opening detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signals are input, a seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g, and an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the signal corresponding to the open/close execution mode is input to the eighth buffer 122h as the eighth signal, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i as the ninth signal, The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal. A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121 . In other words, no signals relating to ball entry history are input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are not determined at the stage of designing the management IC 66. It is specified by the management side CPU 112 . The processing for specifying the type of this signal is executed when supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the input of the output instruction signal to the 16th buffer 122p is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management side CPU 112 outputs to the 16th buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main side CPU 63. It is possible to specify that an instruction signal is input.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in this embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the first buffer counter 152a. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the second buffer counter 152b. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third buffer counter 152c. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from LOW level to HI level is stored in the fifth buffer counter 152e. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from LOW level to HI level. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh buffer counter 152g. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The 13th buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the 13th signal input to the 13th buffer 122m is changed from LOW level to HI level. The 14th buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the 14th signal input to the 14th buffer 122n is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

However, the objects to be measured using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are any of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. 1st to 7th buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of hitting a ball into one are input. Therefore, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement targets. The determination as to whether or not an object is to be measured is made based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. FIG.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing a history setting process executed by the management side CPU 112. As shown in FIG. Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). When the value of the check target counter is "n", the n-th buffers 122a to 122o are to be checked for numerical information. For example, if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "5", the fifth buffer 122e is to be confirmed for numerical information, and if the value of the counter to be confirmed is "1", the first buffer 122a is to be confirmed for numerical information. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, addition processing of the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o is executed (step S2403). In the addition processing, one is added to the value of the counter corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152 a to 152 o of the history memory 117 . For example, if the check target counter value is "5", the fifth buffer counter 152e is added, and if the check target counter value is "1", the first buffer counter 152a is added.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, or when the process of step S2403 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2405). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the process after step S2402 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter.

By executing the history setting process as described above, the entry history of game balls into the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is It is not stored as history information as in the first embodiment, but is stored as information on the number of times game balls have been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing external output processing in this embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main side CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), the output target counters provided in the management side RAM 114 store the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152b. 152o, the number of counters to be output of the number information is set in the management side CPU 112 (step S2502). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the present embodiment, as already described, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g, so in step S2502 "7" is set in the output target counter. .

After that, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read out (step S2503). Of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117, the number of times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value is read out (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is "n", the n-th correspondence area 123a to 123o becomes the object to read the correspondence information, and the n-th buffer counter 152a to 152o reads the frequency information. Be eligible. For example, if the value of the output target counter is "5", the fifth correspondence area 123e becomes the target of reading the correspondence information, and the fifth buffer counter 152e becomes the target of reading the frequency information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is "1", the first correspondence area 123a becomes the object of reading the correspondence information and the first buffer counter 152a becomes the object of reading the frequency information.

After that, information output processing is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, a combination of the correspondence information read out in step S2503 and the number of times information read out in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102 . As a result, the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 reads the number-of-times information about the correspondence information to be output this time.

After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output object counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2507). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the process from step S2503 onwards is executed for the output target corresponding to the new value of the output target counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to "0".

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process of step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

First, it is determined whether or not there is an opportunity to calculate various parameters (step S2601). The calculation trigger is when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and the output port 24a, the general winning port 31, and the special electric winning as in the fifth embodiment. It occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. Since the parameter management process is executed first after the supply of operating power is started is set as a calculation trigger, various parameters can be calculated by turning the power of the pachinko machine 10 off once and then on again. It is possible to easily generate an opportunity. Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, as will be described later, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed. It becomes possible to grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the manner in which game balls enter the game area PA by generating a calculation trigger each time the total number of game balls entering the game ball reaches 500 or more, which is the trigger reference number. becomes.

When the calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the entry history is read out from the entry history storage target counter among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117. FIG. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is to be read, by the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64. FIG.

After that, various calculation processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read out in step S2602 and information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to store the ball entry history read in step S2602 from the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operation port 33, and the first operation port 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two operation ports 34 corresponds, and it is possible to specify information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each ball entry history read in step S2602. .

Specifically, various parameters calculated in step S2603 are:
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general "Number of prize balls for winning to winning opening 31" + K3 x "Number of winning balls for winning to special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of winning balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34" 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x ``For winning to general winning port 31 "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”) is calculated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the first range (step S2604). If the value of the seventh parameter is less than or equal to 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter is less than or equal to 0.6, it is determined that the various calculated parameters are within the first range, and an affirmative determination is made in step S2604. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, setting processing of the first notification state is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to set the first notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 151 emits blue light.

If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, the various calculated parameters 2 range, an affirmative determination is made in step S2606. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the second notification state setting process is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is performed so as to set the second notification state. In this case, the notification light-emitting portion 151 emits yellow light.

A negative determination in step S2606 means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to enter the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting section 151 is in a red light emitting state.

The light emission state set in step S2605, step S2607, or step S2608 is maintained until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. continue until In addition, since the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off once, when the supply of operating power to the main side CPU 63 is resumed, the light emission state corresponding to the type of information of the notification state stored in the main side RAM 65 is set. Light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The entry history of the game ball to the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball is detected by each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 compared to a configuration in which each piece of history information is stored individually.

A notification light emitting unit 151 is provided for notifying contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 . As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself. It is possible to grasp the manner of entering the ball.

A main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a is provided with an MPU 62 and a notification light emitting section 151. As shown in FIG. As a result, unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151 can be made difficult.

Calculation of various parameters and light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed by the main side CPU 63 instead of the management side CPU 112 . This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the content of notification by the notification light emitting unit 151 .

When the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the first range, it is in the first notification state, and when the calculation result of various parameters corresponds to the second range, it is in the second notification state, and the calculation result of various parameters is The third notification state occurs when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. In other words, instead of notifying the various parameters as they are, the content corresponding to the range in which the various parameters are included is notified. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151 .

Note that even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is continued by continuing the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151. A configuration may be adopted in which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball enters the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

Further, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light emitting unit 151 is turned off, but when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. Alternatively, the notification light-emitting unit 151 may be controlled to emit light so as to be in a light-emitting state corresponding to the results of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by checking the notification light emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the manner in which the game ball entered the previous business day.

The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration in which the notification light emitting unit 151 is used. may be Further, a configuration may be adopted in which signals corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters are externally output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal plate 97 .

The special figure display section 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the general figure display section 38a of the general figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting section 151. For example, when the supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or other range as in the above embodiment , Immediately after the start of supply of operating power, it may be configured to perform notification corresponding to the calculation result in the special figure display unit 37a or the normal figure display unit 38a. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition for the variable display of the pattern in the normal figure display unit 38a is satisfied. A configuration may be adopted in which the process is temporarily interrupted when the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it is possible to double use the special figure display section 37a or the normal figure display section 38a as the notification means for notifying the entry state of the game ball in the game area PA.

The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 when the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, the notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position behind the pachinko machine 10 relative to the window panel 52 and visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 . In this case, it is possible to confirm the notification contents corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters without requiring the operation to open the game machine body 12 or the front door frame 14 .

<Twelfth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in the configuration for providing the management IC 66 with information on each ball entry result. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the signal path for inputting the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a to the main side CPU 63 and the management IC 66. As shown in FIG.

The detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. Also, the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Also, the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. Further, the detection result of the first operation port detection sensor 46a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. Further, the detection result of the second operation opening detection sensor 47a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. Further, the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the main side CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

A first branch path SL21 is formed by branching from the middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed by branching from the middle position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC66. A third branch path SL23 is formed by branching from the middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed by branching from the middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed by branching from the middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed by branching from the middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC66.

With the above configuration, the detection results of the respective entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without intervening processing by the main side CPU 63. FIG. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes a process for making the management side CPU 112 recognize the ball entry results of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Since there is no need to do this, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

Further, the branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 are present in the MPU62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch point and the branch routes SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of inputting an abnormal ball entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<Thirteenth Embodiment>
Although the management IC 66 is provided in the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided in this embodiment. Instead, the main side CPU 63 executes a process for managing the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. The configuration that is different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 81 in this embodiment.

An MPU 62 is provided on the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 as in the first embodiment. The MPU 62 is provided with a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65 and an I/F 101 as in the first embodiment, but is not provided with a management IC 66. FIG. The I/F 101 is electrically connected to the main side CPU 63 via the internal bus 103 . Through the input port of the I/F 101, detection results from sensors such as the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, commands from the payout side CPU 92, etc. are input to the MPU 62, and based on the input detection results and command contents. Various processes are executed by the main CPU 63 as already described. In addition, as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to equipment such as the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101. In addition, when a command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81 as a result of various processing executed by the main side CPU 63 , the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 .

The main side CPU 63 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 97 as in the first embodiment. Here, in the first embodiment, a signal is output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, while a signal is not output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 A signal is output from the hall computer HC to the outside, and a signal is output from the hall computer HC to the main side CPU 63 . The types of signals externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, that is, the contents of the information externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC are the same as in the first embodiment. The hall computer HC instructs the main CPU 63 to calculate various parameters using the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 and notify the result of the calculation, although the details will be described later. An instruction signal for starting the check is output.

During the execution of the calculation using the entry history and the execution of the notification of the calculation result, the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 becomes a corresponding mode. The display control execution instruction is executed by the sound emission control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 63 . Specifically, the sound emission control device 81 includes a sound emission control board 161 on which an MPU 162 is mounted. The MPU 162 of the audio emission control board 161 includes a sound and light side CPU 163 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control section and a calculation section, a sound and light side ROM 164, a sound and light side RAM 165, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input/output circuit. It has built-in circuits.

The sound and light side ROM 164 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used exclusively for reading. The sound and light side ROM 164 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the sound and light side CPU 163 .

The sound and light side RAM 165 is a memory (that is, volatile storage means) such as SRAM and DRAM that requires power supply from the outside to hold data, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound and light side RAM 165 can be randomly accessed, and has a shorter time required for reading than the sound and light side ROM 164 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound and light side RAM 165 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the sound and light side ROM 164 .

The sound and light side CPU 163 receives commands from the main side CPU 63 but does not transmit commands to the main side CPU 63 . The sound/light side CPU 163 receives a variation command, a type command, and an opening command from the main side CPU 63 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives these commands, it executes the determination processing of the effect corresponding to the received command, and executes light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the determined content. . Also, a command corresponding to the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 82 . The display control device 82 executes display control of the pattern display device 41 according to the contents of the received command.

The sound/light side CPU 163 receives a demonstration start command and a check start command from the main side CPU 63 in addition to the above commands. A demonstration start command is a command for instructing to start a demonstration effect. The demo effect is a start that is started by the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed since the previous game round ended. It refers to waiting performances. In the start waiting effect, the pattern display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 execute effects different from the effect for the game cycle and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. The check start command, which will be described later in detail, corresponds to the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 during the execution of the calculation using the management result of this entry history and the execution of the notification of the calculation result. This command instructs to set the mode as

FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 .

In steps S2701 to S2705, the same processes as steps S201 to S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, check processing is executed (step S2706). In the check processing, which will be described in detail later, various parameters are calculated using the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, and processing for notifying the result of the calculation is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped or the check result is being displayed (step S2707). As in the first embodiment, when it is confirmed that a predetermined event (for example, unauthorized radio wave detection or unauthorized vibration detection) has occurred in the unauthorized detection process (step S2705), the main RAM 65 By setting "1" to the game stop flag, it is determined that the game is stopped in step S2707. By clearing the game stop flag to "0" when it is confirmed that the occurrence of the predetermined event has been canceled, it is no longer determined that the game is stopped in step S2707. The check result display period is a period during which the calculation results of various parameters executed using the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are reported. is started, the check result display period is set, and when the notification ends in step S2706, the check result display period is canceled.

When a negative determination is made in step S2707, the processing of steps S2708 to S2719 is executed to advance the game. Specifically, in step S2708, port output processing is executed as in step S207 in the first embodiment, read processing is executed in step S2709 as in step S208 in the first embodiment, and step S2710 is executed. In step S2711, timer update processing is executed as in step S210 in the first embodiment, and launch control processing is executed in step S2712 as in step S211 in the first embodiment. Execute, in step S2713 the input state monitoring process is executed in the same manner as in step S212 in the first embodiment, in step S2714 the special figure special train control process is executed, in step S2715 step S214 in the first embodiment In the same way, the normal map normal electric control process is executed, and in step S2716, the display control process is executed in the same manner as in step S215 in the first embodiment, and in step S2717, in the same manner as step S216 in the first embodiment. Payout state reception processing is executed, payout output processing is executed in step S2718 in the same manner as in step S217 in the first embodiment, and external information setting processing is executed in step S2719 in the same manner as in step S218 in the first embodiment. Execute.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the processing of steps S2708 to S2719 is not executed. As a result, if the game is stopped in the fraud detection process of step S2705 or if the check result display period is set in the check process of step S2706, the game is allowed to proceed. Some of the processes required for this purpose will not be executed.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the special figure special electric control process executed in step S2714.

First, it is determined whether or not it is time to start demonstration display (step S2801). If the demonstration display is not performed and a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has passed since the previous game round ended, it is determined that it is time to start the demonstration display. If it is time to start the demonstration display (step S2801: YES), a demonstration start command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 (step S2802).

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing effect control processing executed by the sound and light side CPU 163. As shown in FIG. Note that the effect control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (eg, 4 msec). When the sound/light side CPU 163 receives the demonstration start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S2902: YES), it executes demonstration effect determination processing (step S2903). In the demonstration effect determination process, the data table of the demonstration effect is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 . Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the display light-emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 perform a demonstration effect. After that, a demonstration start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2904). Upon receiving the demonstration start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect for the demonstration effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52), when the negative determination is made in step S2801 or when the processing of step S2802 is executed, the acquisition processing of the pending information is executed (step S2803). In the reservation information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 has occurred, and if the winning has occurred, the number of reservations in the reservation storage area 65a is the upper limit It is determined whether or not it is less than a value (“4” in this embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, add 1 to the number of reservations, and each numerical value information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is used for the reservation. Store in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. It should be noted that when the winning to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 occurs at the same time, the processing for acquiring the above-described pending information is executed within the range of executing the processing for acquiring the pending information once. Run multiple times.

In addition, when the hold information is newly acquired, a corresponding acquisition command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 . When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the acquisition command, it transmits a command corresponding to the acquisition command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the effect control processing (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 that has received the command changes the display mode in the pending display area Ga (FIG. 66(b)) in the pattern display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase in the pending information. Details of the reserved display area Ga will be described later.

Thereafter, the information of the special special electric counter provided in the main side RAM 65 is read (step S2804), and the special special electric address table provided in the main side ROM 64 is read (step S2805). Then, the start address corresponding to the information of the special special electric counter is acquired from the special special electric counter from the special special electric address table (step S2806), and jumps to the processing indicated by the acquired start address among the processing of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807 ). The special special electric counter is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes of steps S2808 to S2814 should be executed, and the special special electric address table is a counter for the special special electric counter The start address of the program for executing the processing of steps S2808 to S2814 is set in association with the numerical information.

In step S2808 special figure fluctuation start processing is executed. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a special figure variation start process.

In the special figure fluctuation start process, on condition that the number of pieces of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE is 1 or more (step S3001: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S3002). In the data setting process, first, the number of reservations is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE is moved to the execution area AE. After that, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4 of the reservation area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area RE2→first reservation area RE1, third reservation area RE3→second reservation area RE2, fourth reservation area RE4→third reservation area RE3. At this time, a shift command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 for recognizing that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the shift command, it transmits a command corresponding to the shift command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the effect control processing (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 that has received the command changes the display mode in the pending display area Ga (FIG. 66(b)) in the pattern display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the decrease of the pending information. Details of the reserved display area Ga will be described later.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 54), after executing the data setting processing, the propriety determination processing is executed (step S3003). In the success/failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success/failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. In the high-probability mode, the success/failure table for the high-probability mode provided in the main-side ROM 64 is referred to, and among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for the success/failure determination, that is, the winning random number counter C1. It is determined whether or not the numerical information matches the jackpot numerical information for high probability. Further, in the case of the low-probability mode, the success/failure table for the low-probability mode provided in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the numerical information relating to the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is changed to the value for the low-probability mode. It is determined whether or not it matches with the jackpot numerical information.

If the result of the success/failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S3004: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S3005). In the distribution determination process, out of the information stored in the execution area AE, information for distribution determination, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is read. Then, referring to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 64, it specifies which jackpot result the numerical information related to the read jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to. Specifically, it specifies which one of the low probability jackpot result, the low prize winning high probability jackpot result, and the maximum profit jackpot result corresponds.

After that, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3006). Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the main ROM 64. specified, and writes the specified information in the main side RAM 65 . In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the form of the pattern stopped and displayed on the special figure display section 37a is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

After that, flag setting processing corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, the main RAM 65 is provided with flags corresponding to the types of each jackpot result, and in step S3007, among the flags corresponding to each jackpot result type, A flag corresponding to the result is set to "1".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is obtained from the stop result table for the outlier result stored in advance in the main side ROM 64 specified, and writes the specified information in the main side RAM 65 . The information on the form of the pattern selected in this case is different from the information on the form of the pattern selected in the case of the jackpot result.

After executing the processing of either step S3007 or step S3008, the process of grasping the duration of the game round is executed (step S3009). In such processing, the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. Also, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game round related to the start of this fluctuation is the result of the low-probability jackpot or the result of the maximum profit jackpot, it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs. In addition, when neither of the jackpot results is obtained and the numerical information relating to the ready-to-win random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of ready-to-win, it is determined that a ready-to-win display occurs.

When it is determined that the ready-to-win display occurs, the continuous period table for ready-to-win occurrence generation stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the duration of the game cycle corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the ready-to-win display does not occur, the continuous period table for no-to-win occurrence stored in the main ROM 64 is referred to, and the continuation of the game round corresponding to the numerical information of the current fluctuation type counter CS. Get duration. Incidentally, the duration of the game times that can be obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game times that can be obtained by referring to the duration table for reach occurrence.

It should be noted that the continuation period of the game round when the ready-to-win situation does not occur is set so that the continuation period of the game round becomes shorter as the number of reservation information stored in the reservation area RE increases. In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the duration of the game round is selected so that it is shorter. A non-reach duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the duration of the game cycle does not change according to the number of pieces of pending information and the support mode, or the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the continuation period of the game cycle when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, the duration table may be set individually for each of the case of the loss reach and the case of the loss result of no reach. In this case, the continuation period of the game round is distributed according to each game result.

After that, the information of the duration of the game round acquired in step S3009 is set in the special figure special electric timer counter provided in the main side RAM 65 (step S3010). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electric timer counter is executed in the timer update process (step S2711). By the way, as an effect for the game round, the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a and the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 are performed. is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a predetermined combination of symbols is waiting on the activated line), the final stop display is performed for the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). In this case, the duration of the game round acquired in step S3009 is the total time for one game round.

After that, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 (step S3011). The variation command includes information on the duration of game rounds. Here, as described above, the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the non-reach duration table is different from the duration of the game round obtained by referring to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the variation command does not include information on the occurrence of reach occurrence, the sound and light side CPU 163 can identify the occurrence of reach occurrence from the information on the duration of the game cycle. In this respect, it can be said that the variation command includes information indicating whether or not reach occurs. Note that the variation command may include information that directly indicates the presence or absence of reach occurrence. Also, the type command includes information on the game result.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the variation command and the type command from the main side CPU 63, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2905 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to execute the effect determination process for the game round (step S2906). In the effect determination process for the game round, the effect lottery process is executed according to the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time. Also, the data table corresponding to the combination of the content of the command for variation and the type command received this time and the result of the effect lottery process is read from the ROM 164 on the sound and light side to the RAM 165 on the sound and light side. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the game round is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 over the duration of the game round determined this time by the main CPU 63 . Thereafter, a variation pattern command corresponding to the type of data table read in step S2906 is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2907). By receiving the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 starts the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41, thereby starting the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41, and the variation pattern command received this time. The symbol display device 41 is displayed and controlled so that the performance for the game round corresponding to is executed.

Returning to the description of the special figure fluctuation start processing (FIG. 54), after executing the processing of step S3011, the fluctuation display of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is started (step S3012). And 1 is added to the special figure special electric counter (step S3013). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is "0", when the processing of step S3013 is performed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is "1 ”.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52), in step S2809, the special figure fluctuation processing is executed. In the special figure fluctuation process, it is determined whether or not it is the timing before the final stop display during the duration of the game round, and if it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is regulated. Executes processing to change the When it is time to display the final stop, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure fluctuation processing to the special figure fixed processing. update to something. In this embodiment, the main side CPU 63 does not send the final stop command to the sound and light side CPU 163 .

In step S2810, processing during special figure determination is executed. In the process during special figure determination, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is set to the display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game round. Also, in the special figure finalizing process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and when the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening/closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening/closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special special electric counter is cleared to "0". When the transition to the opening and closing execution mode occurs, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric confirmation processing to the one corresponding to the special electric start processing. Update.

In step S2811, special electric start processing is executed. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing special electric start processing.

In the special electric start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening/closing execution mode has not yet been executed (step S3101: NO), the opening period setting process is executed (step S3102). In the set process, the information of the opening period (for example, 5 sec) is set to the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM65. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 (step S3103).

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the opening command from the main side CPU 63, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2908 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to execute the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode (step S2909). In the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode, the data table for the opening/closing execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165 . Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 . After that, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2910). When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

The effect for the opening/closing execution mode includes the effect for the opening period that occurs when the opening/closing execution mode is started, the effect for the opening/closing period in which the opening/closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 is repeated after that, and the opening/closing execution mode. It includes the production of the ending period that occurs when you do. For example, in the pattern display device 41, an image indicating that the opening/closing execution mode has started is displayed in the opening period effect, and an image indicating that the special electric winning device 32 is opened and closed is displayed in the opening/closing period effect. In the effect during the ending period, an image indicating that the opening/closing execution mode will end is displayed. In addition, the opening command includes information indicating the type of the jackpot result that triggered the start of the opening/closing execution mode this time, and the sound and light side CPU 163 and the display control device 82 refer to the information to determine the jackpot result. To execute the performance for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type.

Returning to the description of the special electric start processing (FIG. 55), if the opening period has passed (step S3104: YES), the start processing for starting the first round game is executed (step S3105). In the start process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state, and conditions for ending the round game are set. When setting the end condition, the upper limit duration time for continuing the special electric prize winning device 32 in the open state in the first round game of this time is set to the special electric special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and the first round of this time is set. The upper limit number of game balls that can be won in the special electric prize winning device 32 in the game is set in the winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加The upper limit duration set in the special electric power timer counter is updated in the timer update processing (step S2711) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51), and the upper limit number set in the winning number counter is the winning to the special electric power winning device 32. is decremented by 1 each time. After that, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the information corresponding to the special electric start processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing (step S3106).

Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52), in step S2812, the special electric open processing is executed. In the special electric open process, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is established. When the termination condition is established, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. Then, if the round game ended this time is not the last round game to be executed, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special electric open processing to the special electric closed processing. If the round game that ended this time is the last round game, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is added by 2, so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric open processing. Update from one to one corresponding to the special electric end processing.

In step S2813, processing during special electric closing is executed. In the special electric closing process, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65 when the previous round game ends, and the set value is updated by the timer update processing (step S2711) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51). be. When the interval period has passed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is put into an open state, and conditions for ending the round game are set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical value information of the special special electric counter, the numerical value information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric closed processing to the one corresponding to the special electric open processing.

In step S2814, a special electric end process is executed. In the special electric end processing, if the processing for starting the ending period in the opening and closing execution mode this time has not yet been executed, the ending period (for example, 5 sec) information is set in the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, An ending command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 . When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main side CPU 63, the data table for the ending period is transferred from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 in other processing (step S2914) of the effect control processing (FIG. 53). read out. Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 . After that, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82 . By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

Next, the ball-entering detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described.

First, the normal counter area 171, open/close execution mode counter area 172, and high frequency support mode counter area 173 provided in the main RAM 65 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. Each of these areas 171 to 173 includes general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c, second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and Out counters 171e, 172e and 173e are provided. The general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The special electric prize-winning counters 171b, 172b, and 173b are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the special electric prize-winning device 32 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are counters for measuring the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 171e, 172e, 173e are counters for measuring the number of game balls entered into the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start timing.

Each of the counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 is in a state in which the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and neither in the opening/closing execution mode nor in the high-frequency support mode. It is used to count the number of game balls entered in 31-34. Each of the counters 172a to 172e of the opening/closing execution mode counter area 172 is in the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is in the state. It is used to count the number of game balls thrown. Each of the counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 is for the target ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 in the high-frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is closed. It is used to count the number of game balls entered in the . The reason why the state in which the front door frame 14 is open is not subject to measurement is that when the front door frame 14 is opened, a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 by maintenance. This is to exclude the number of balls entered in the case where the number of balls is counted.

FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing the ball entry detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63. FIG.

When the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S3201: YES), the ball entering detection process includes normal ball entering detection process (step S3204), ball entering detection process during opening/closing execution mode (step S3205), and None of the ball entry detection processing (step S3206) during the high-frequency support mode is executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space partitioned in the front and rear by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, Even if the game area PA is opened forward and a game ball is shot toward the game area PA in this situation, the game ball cannot flow down the game area PA normally. In addition, when a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 while the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the game hall administrator may This is the case where the front door frame 14 is in an open state and a game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a regular game execution situation, there is no need to manage such a game ball entry. Therefore, in the entering ball detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S3204 to S3206 are executed.

If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is set (steps S3201 to S3203: NO), normal entering ball detection processing is executed (step S3204). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is set (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), an entering ball detection process during the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S3205). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the high-frequency support mode is set (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), ball entry detection processing during the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing normal ball entry detection processing in step S3204.

If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a (step S3301: YES), if it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a ( Step S3304: YES), or when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a (step S3307: YES), the value of the normal winning counter 171a is incremented by 1 (step S3302, step S3305, step S3308). Also, 1 is added to the value of the 10-ball counter in the main RAM 65 (steps S3303, S3306, S3309). In the open/close execution mode entry ball detection process, as processing corresponding to steps S3302, S3305 and S3308, 1 is added to the value of the general prize winning counter 172a for the opening/closing execution mode, and entry in the high frequency support mode is performed. If it is ball detection processing, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 173a for the high-frequency support mode as processing corresponding to steps S3302, S3305 and S3308.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3310: YES), after setting the special electric winning flag of the main side RAM 65 to "1" (step S3311), the normal special electric winning The value of the counter 171b is incremented by 1 (step S3312). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the counter for 15 prize balls in the main RAM 65 (step S3313). In addition, if the entering ball detection process is in the opening/closing execution mode, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter 172b for the opening/closing execution mode as a process corresponding to step S3312, and if the ball entry detection process is in the high frequency support mode, As processing corresponding to step S3312, 1 is added to the value of the special electric winning counter 173b for the high-frequency support mode.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a (step S3314: YES), after setting "1" to the first operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3315), The value of the first operation counter 171c for normal use is incremented by 1 (step S3316). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S3317). In addition, if the entering ball detection process is during the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 172c for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3316, and if the ball entry detection process is during the high frequency support mode, For example, as processing corresponding to step S3316, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter 173c for the high frequency support mode.

When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a (step S3318: YES), after setting "1" to the second operation winning flag of the main side RAM 65 (step S3319), The value of the second operation counter 171d for normal use is incremented by 1 (step S3320). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the one prize ball counter of the main side RAM 65 (step S3321). In the case of the ball entry detection process during the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 172d for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as processing corresponding to step S3320, and if the ball entry detection process is during the high-frequency support mode, For example, as processing corresponding to step S3320, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter 173d for the high frequency support mode.

When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the out hole detection sensor 48a (step S3322: YES), the value of the normal out counter 171e is incremented by 1 (step S3323). If the entering ball detection process is in the opening/closing execution mode, the value of the out counter 172e for the opening/closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3323, and if the entry ball detection process is in the high frequency support mode, step As a process corresponding to S3323, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 173e for the high frequency support mode.

If it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3324: YES), the gate winning flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3325).

By executing the ball-entering detection process as described above, the number of game balls entering the general winning hole 31 is measured using the general winning counters 171a, 172a, and 173a, and the game to the special electric winning device 32 is counted. The number of balls entered is measured using special electric winning counters 171b, 172b, 173b, and the number of game balls entered into the first operation opening 33 is measured using first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c. , the number of game balls entering the second operation opening 34 is measured using second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and the number of game balls entering the out opening 24a is counted by out counters 171e, 172e, 173e. is measured using As a result, the main side CPU 63 can grasp the ball entry history to each of the ball entry portions 24a, 31-34. In addition, since the normal counter area 171, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are separately provided, it is possible to avoid a situation in which neither the opening/closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is used. It is possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the ball entry history to each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the opening/closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode.

Next, the check processing executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

If it is neither a check result display period nor a check waiting period (steps S3401 and S3402: NO), it is determined whether or not an instruction signal to start checking has been received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97 ( step S3403). As already explained, the instruction signal for starting the check is a hall for instructing calculation of various parameters using the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 and notification of the calculation results. Output from the computer HC. The trigger for the hall computer HC to output the instruction signal to start checking is arbitrary. It may be configured to output an instruction signal to start, or to output an instruction signal to start checking from the hall computer HC to all the pachinko machines 10 at a predetermined time. It may be configured such that the instruction signal to start checking is output from the hall computer HC to all the pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has passed since the previous transmission of the instruction signal to start checking.

If an instruction signal to start checking has been received (step S3403: YES), game ball firing prohibition processing is executed (step S3404). As a result, even if the shooting operation device 28 is operated to shoot the game balls in a state where the game balls are normally stored in the upper tray 55a, the game balls are shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27. It becomes an unbreakable state. This state in which the shooting of game balls is prohibited is canceled when the calculation results of various parameters using the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 are finished.

After that, a game cycle interruption process is executed (step S3405). In the game round interruption processing, if the game round is not being executed, the start of a new game round and the new start of the demonstration display are prohibited. As a result, even if new hold information is acquired in a situation where the game round is not executed, the start of the game round triggered by the hold information is put on standby, and the new start of the demonstration display is also put on standby. It should be noted that new start of the demonstration display is prohibited by blocking the execution of step S2802 of the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52).

In addition, in the game round interruption process, if the game round is being executed, the main CPU 63 stops measuring the duration of the game round. Specifically, during execution of the game round, the duration of the game round is set in the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and the value of this special special electric timer counter is set to the timer of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51). Although it will be periodically updated in the update process (step S2711), the update of the special figure special electric timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. Incidentally, when the game round interruption process is executed, the process for starting the game round and the process for advancing the game round in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) are not executed. However, even if the interruption processing of the game round is executed, the reservation information acquisition processing (step S2803) in the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52) is executed.

After that, the opening/closing execution mode interruption process is executed (step S3406). In the opening/closing execution mode interruption processing, if the opening/closing execution mode is not being executed, the new opening/closing execution mode is prohibited from being started. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode interruption processing, if the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, the measurement of the opening period, the upper limit duration of the round game, the interval period, or the ending period measured by the main CPU 63 is stopped. . Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set to the special special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65, and during the execution of the round game, the upper limit duration of the special electric winning device 32 is set to the special special electric timer of the main side RAM 65 It is set in the counter, the interval period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65 between a plurality of round games, and the ending period is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main side RAM 65 in the ending period The value of this special special electric timer counter will be periodically updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), but the update of the special special electric timer counter by this timer update process Stop. Further, in the interruption processing of the opening/closing execution mode, if the special electric prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed. When the opening/closing execution mode interruption process is executed, the process for starting the opening/closing execution mode and the process for advancing the opening/closing execution mode in the special special train control process (Fig. 52) are not executed. . However, even if the interruption processing of the opening and closing execution mode is executed, the reservation information acquisition processing (step S2803) in the special figure special electric control processing (FIG. 52) is executed.

After that, the interruption processing of the general map general electric control is executed (step S3407). In the suspension processing of the normal map display unit 38a, if the normal map display unit 38a is not in the variable display and the general power supply 34a is not in the normal open state, the normal map display unit 38a is newly changed. Prohibit start. As a result, even if the value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is newly acquired in a situation where the control of the general electric system is not executed, the new fluctuation display times of the general electric system display unit 38a triggered by the value start is awaited. In addition, in the interruption processing of the normal map normal power control, if the normal map display unit 38a is during the variable display, the updating of the timer of the main side RAM 65 that measures the variable display period is stopped. In addition, in the interruption process of the general electric utility control, if the general electric utility 34a is in the open state, the general electric utility 34a is closed and the update of the open time of the general electric utility 34a is stopped. In addition, even if the interruption processing of the general electric power control is executed, the value of the general electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the general electric reservation area 65c for the occurrence of the game ball entering the second operation port 34 Processing is performed.

Then, memory processing of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3408). In the storage process, data indicating the current display content in the special-figure display section 37a is stored in the main-side RAM65, and data indicating the current display content in the normal-figure display section 38a is stored in the main-side RAM65. After that, start processing of the check waiting display of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3409). In the start processing of the check waiting display, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are changed to the display contents for notifying that the current situation is the check waiting period. The check waiting period refers to the calculation of various parameters using the history of ball entry into each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 in response to the reception of the instruction signal to start the check from the hall computer HC. This is the waiting period until the notification of the result is started.

Here, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a will be described.

First, the special figure display unit 37a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(a). FIG. 60(a) is a front view of the special figure display section 37a. The special figure display unit 37a is provided with seven display segments 181-187. Each of the display segments 181 to 187 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light any one of the display segments 181 to 187. and any combination of display segments 181-187 can be illuminated. Since all the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments 181 to 187 all display the same color, but are not limited to this. Alternatively, each of the display segments 181 to 187 may display different colors, or each of the display segments 181 to 187 may display a plurality of colors. The first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are arranged so as to form a so-called 7-segment display. Thus, in the special figure display section 37a, it is possible to display a plurality of types such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L".

FIG. 60(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 37a during execution of the game round, in the special figure display unit 37a, only the second display segment 182 and the fifth display segment 185 are lit. Only the first display segment 181 is lit, only the third display segment 183 and the sixth display segment 186 are lit, and only the seventh display segment 187 is lit. In addition, in the special figure display unit 37a, only the fourth display segment 184 is lit as a result of stopping in the game round of the result of the deviation, and "2" or "4" is displayed as a stop result in the game round of the low probability big hit result. , the lighting state in which "6" or "9" is displayed as a result of stopping in the game round of the low winning high probability jackpot result, and "L" or "" is displayed as the stopping result in the game round of the maximum profit jackpot result. H” is displayed and the lighting state is reached.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are lit. The display contents corresponding to this check waiting period do not match any of the display contents of the situation in which the special figure display part 37a changes the pattern during execution of the game round, and furthermore, the game round stop result It also does not match all display contents that can be displayed as As a result, the administrator of the game hall can clearly grasp whether the current state is the check waiting period by viewing the special figure display portion 37a.

After the end of the check waiting period, notification of calculation results of various parameters using the history of entering balls to each entering part 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using the special figure display part 37a. At the time of this notification, the special figure display section 37a becomes a lighting state in which "3", "5" or "7" is displayed. The display contents corresponding to the display period of these check results do not match any of the display contents in the situation where the pattern is displayed in the special figure display section 37a during the execution of the game round. It also does not match all display contents that can be displayed as a stop result. Further, the display contents corresponding to the check result display period do not match the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, not only is it possible for the manager of the gaming hall to clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by looking at the special figure display section 37a, but also the current state is the check result display period. It becomes possible to clearly grasp whether or not it is.

Next, the general pattern display unit 38a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 60(b). FIG. 60(b) is a front view of the normal figure display section 38a. Seven display segments 191 to 197 are provided in the normal map display portion 38a. Each of the display segments 191 to 197 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light any one of the display segments 191 to 197. and any combination of display segments 191-197 can be illuminated. Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments 191 to 197 all display the same color, but are not limited to this. Alternatively, each of the display segments 191 to 197 may display a different color, or each of the display segments 191 to 197 may display a plurality of colors. The first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are arranged so as to form a so-called 7-segment display. As a result, it is possible to display a plurality of types of numbers such as numbers "1" to "9" and alphabets "H" and "L" in the normal diagram display section 38a.

FIG. 60(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the normal pattern display section 38a. When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the normal pattern display unit 38a, in the normal pattern display unit 38a, only the second display segment 192 and the fifth display segment 195 are in the lighting state → only the first display segment 191 is lit, only the third display segment 193 and the sixth display segment 196 are lit, and only the seventh display segment 197 is lit. In addition, in the normal diagram display unit 38a, only the fourth display segment 194 is lit as a result of stopping the variable display times that resulted in a loss in the normal electric open lottery, and the variable display that resulted in the winning result in the normal electric open lottery. As a result of the stoppage of the cycle, it becomes a lighting state in which "H" is displayed.

On the other hand, during the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any of the display content in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed in the normal pattern display section 38a, and furthermore, all that can be displayed as a result of stopping the variable display times does not match the display contents of As a result, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the general pattern display section 38a.

In addition, the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period in the normal figure display section 38a are consistent with the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period in the special figure display section 37a. That is, during the check waiting period, the same corresponding display contents are displayed in both the special figure display portion 37a and the normal figure display portion 38a. This makes it easier for the manager of the gaming hall to grasp whether the current state is the check waiting period.

After the end of the check waiting period, notification of calculation results of various parameters using the history of entering balls into the respective ball entering units 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using not only the special figure display unit 37a but also the normal figure display unit 38a. It will be done. In this case, at the time of this notification, the normal figure display section 38a enters a lighting state in which "2", "3" or "4" is displayed. The display contents corresponding to the display period of these check results do not match any of the display contents in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed in the normal pattern display section 38a, and furthermore, as a result of stopping after the variable display of the pattern, It also does not match all possible display contents. Further, the display contents corresponding to the check result display period do not match the display contents corresponding to the check waiting period. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall not only can clearly grasp whether the current state is the check waiting period by looking at the normal figure display section 38a, but also the current state is the check result display period. It becomes possible to clearly grasp whether or not it is.

Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 59), after executing the process of step S3409, the process of setting the check waiting counter is executed (step S3410). In the set processing, information corresponding to the check waiting period is set in the check waiting counter provided in the main RAM 65 . Specifically, the check waiting period is set to 5 seconds. During this time, after the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the shooting operation device 28, the shot game ball hits one of the ball entering portions 24a, 31 to 34 of the game area PA. Sufficiently longer than the longest time required for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the ball has entered and has been detected by the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 that entered the ball. set on time. Then, as already explained, when an instruction signal for starting a check is received from the hall computer HC, shooting of game balls is prohibited in step S3404. As a result, all of the game balls flowing down the game area PA will not exist until the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entry history to each ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34 before the check waiting period elapses. are all acquired.

After that, the check waiting flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3411). The check waiting flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is a check waiting period. Also, in step S3412, a check start command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163. FIG.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, the end standby flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 is set to "1" by making an affirmative determination in step S2911 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) ( step S2912). The end standby flag is a flag for specifying the end standby state by the sound and light side CPU 163. When the end standby flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2901. becomes. Details of the control in the end standby state will be described later. Also, a check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82 in step S2913. When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the display control device 82 causes the pattern display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the completion waiting state. The contents of this display will be described later.

Returning to the description of the check processing (FIG. 59), the check waiting period is entered by setting the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 to "1" in step S3411. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, and check waiting processing is executed (step S3413). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing check waiting processing.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check waiting counter of the main RAM 65 (step S3501). If the value of the check waiting counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3502: YES), the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This ends the check waiting period.

After that, aggregation processing is executed (step S3504). In the counting process, the various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 are used to calculate the seventh and eighth parameters, and the various counters 172a to 172e in the open/close execution mode counter area 172 are used to calculate the seventh parameter. and the eighth parameter, and using various counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173, the seventh and eighth parameters are calculated. In detail, the values of the out counters 171e, 172e and 173e are K1, the values of the general winning counters 171a, 172a and 173a are K2, and the values of the special electric winning counters 171b, 172b and 173b are is K3, the values of the first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c are K4, and the values of the second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d are K5,
・Seventh parameter: (K3 x "number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K5 x "number of prize balls for winning to second operation port 34") / total number of game balls paid out (K2 x "general The number of prize balls for winning to the winning opening 31" + K3 × "Number of prize balls for winning to the special electric winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to the first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Second operation opening 34 8th parameter: K3 x ``Number of prize balls for winning to special electric winning device 32''/Total number of game balls paid out (K2 x `` "Number of prize balls" + K3 x "Number of prize balls for winning to special electric prize winning device 32" + K4 x "Number of prize balls for winning to first operation opening 33" + K5 x "Number of prize balls for winning to second operation opening 34" ”).

The seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 are the conditions in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and in either the opening/closing execution mode or the high-frequency support mode. 7th and 8th parameters in a situation that is not normal (hereinafter also referred to as normal parameters). Further, the seventh and eighth parameters calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e in the opening/closing execution mode counter area 172 correspond to the state in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode. (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode). Further, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are calculated in the high-frequency support mode when the front door frame 14 is closed. These are the seventh and eighth parameters in a certain situation (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the high-frequency support mode).

In addition, in the tallying process, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is performed for each of the various parameters in the normal mode, the various parameters in the open/close execution mode, and the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. run against That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated parameters are within the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0.6. 7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the seventh When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination processing that the calculated various parameters are in the third range is performed. It is executed for each of various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode and various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. Then, information on the determination result is written in the main RAM 65 .

After executing the tallying process in step S3504, the check result display start process is executed (step S3505). In the check result display start process, after finishing the display of the display contents of the check waiting period in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, the display corresponding to the result of the totalization process in step S3504 is displayed in the special figure display unit 37a and normal map display unit 38a. In this case, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a do not continue the same display during the display period of the check result, but display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters at normal time, opening and closing execution mode The display corresponding to the determination results for the various parameters during the time and the display corresponding to the determination results for the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode are sequentially displayed in this order, and the sequential display in this order is repeated. Display control of the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a is carried out like this.

Specifically, in the normal diagram display unit 38a, the display corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in the normal state, the display corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in the open/close execution mode, and the display corresponding to the above determination results in the high frequency support mode A display indicating which of the displays corresponding to the determination results for the various parameters is to be displayed is performed. As already explained, the lighting state in which "2", "3" and "4" are displayed is set as the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the normal diagram display section 38a. Of these, when the display corresponding to the determination results of the various parameters in the normal state is to be displayed, "2" is displayed in the normal diagram display section 38a, and the determination results of the various parameters in the open/close execution mode are displayed. When the display corresponding to is to be displayed, "3" is displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, and when the display corresponding to the above determination result regarding various parameters in the high-frequency support mode is to be displayed , "4" is displayed in the normal map display section 38a.

In addition, in the special figure display section 37a, the display corresponding to the determination result of each of the various parameters in the normal time, the various parameters in the opening and closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high frequency support mode is performed. As already explained, the lighting state in which "3", "5" and "7" are displayed is set as the display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the special figure display section 37a. Among them, when the above determination result corresponds to the first range, "3" is displayed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the above determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display section "5" is displayed at 37a, and "7" is displayed at the special figure display portion 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range.

When the display period of the check result is started, since the display corresponding to the determination result of the various parameters in the normal state is to be displayed, "2" is displayed first in the normal diagram display section 38a. In this normal target period, the special figure display unit 37a performs display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters at normal time. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range "3" is displayed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range special figure display section "5" is displayed at 37a, and "7" is displayed at the special figure display portion 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is the first range, "2" is continuously displayed in the normal figure display section 38a in the normal target period, and "3" is continuously displayed in the special figure display section 37a. The normal target period lasts for 5 seconds.

When the normal target period has elapsed, "3" is displayed in the normal diagram display section 38a because the display corresponding to the determination result of the various parameters in the open/close execution mode is subsequently displayed. During this open/close execution mode target period, the special figure display section 37a displays a display corresponding to the determination result of various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range "3" is displayed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range special figure display section "5" is displayed at 37a, and "7" is displayed at the special figure display portion 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is the second range, "3" is continuously displayed in the normal figure display section 38a and "5" is continuously displayed in the special figure display section 37a during the open/close execution mode target period. . The opening/closing execution mode target period lasts for 5 seconds, like the normal target period.

When the open/close execution mode target period has passed, the display corresponding to the determination result of the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode is subsequently displayed, so "4" is displayed in the normal diagram display section 38a. . During this high-frequency support mode target period, the special figure display section 37a displays the above-described determination results for various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range "3" is displayed in the special figure display section 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range special figure display section "5" is displayed at 37a, and "7" is displayed at the special figure display portion 37a when the determination result corresponds to the third range. For example, if the determination result is the third range, "4" is continuously displayed in the normal figure display section 38a in the high frequency support mode target period, and "7" is continuously displayed in the special figure display section 37a. be. The high-frequency support mode target period lasts for 5 seconds in the same manner as the normal target period and the opening/closing execution mode target period.

The check result display period is set to a period in which each of the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the check result display period is set to 30 seconds so that each of the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period occurs twice. In the display period of the check result, the change of the period of normal target period→opening/closing execution mode target period→high-frequency support mode target period is repeatedly executed.

After executing the processing of step S3505 in the check waiting processing (FIG. 61), information corresponding to the display period of the check result (specifically, 30 seconds) is set in the display counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( step S3506). After that, the display flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3507). The on-display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is the check result display period.

When "1" is set in the display flag of the main side RAM 65, an affirmative determination is made in step S2707 in the timer interrupt processing of the main side CPU 63 (FIG. 51). In this case, the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) are not executed. For example, even if a game ball enters the ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34, it is invalidated because the ball entering detection process (step S2710) is not executed. However, as already explained, before the start of the check result display period, the legally launched game ball does not exist in the game area PA, so the legally launched game ball is checked. During the result display period, the ball does not enter any of the ball entering sections 24a, 31-34. In addition, all the control of the special figure special electric including the reservation information acquisition process (step S2803) are stopped by the special figure special electric control processing (step S2714) being no longer executed. In addition, all the control of the normal map general electric power is stopped by the normal map general electric control processing (step S2715) is no longer executed. In addition, since the payout output process (step S2718) is no longer executed, the game ball payout instruction to the payout side CPU 92 is all stopped. However, the payout of game balls based on the winning ball command, which has already been output to the payout side CPU 92, is continued under drive control by the payout side CPU92.

In the check processing (FIG. 59) by setting the display flag of the main RAM 65 to "1", affirmative determination is made in step S3401, and the check result display processing is executed (step S3414). FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing processing during display of check results.

First, 1 is subtracted from the display counter value of the main RAM 65 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the on-display counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3602).

If the value of the counter being displayed is not "0" (step S3602: NO), any one of the normal target period, the open/close execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period is included in the check result display period. It is determined whether or not it is time to end and switch to the next target period (step S3603). Whether or not it is time to switch the target period is determined based on the value of the counter during display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, display content update processing is executed (step S3604). In the update process, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal display unit 37a are changed so that the display contents correspond to the next target period for the current target period among the normal target period, the opening/closing execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period. It controls the display of the figure display section 38a. In this case, for the normal figure display unit 38a, display control is performed so that the display content corresponds to the target period of the switching destination, and for the special figure display unit 37a, the aggregation processing (step In S3504), display control is performed so that the display contents of the determination result information corresponding to the current switching target period among the determination result information written in the main RAM 65 are displayed.

When it determines with the value of the counter during display of main side RAM65 being "0" in step S3602, the display restoration process of the special figure display part 37a and the normal figure display part 38a is performed (step S3605). In the display return process, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are displayed so as to be the display contents stored in the main side RAM65 in step S3408 of the check processing (FIG. 59). Display control is performed on the display unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a. As a result, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are returned to the display contents immediately before the check waiting period starts.

After that, the display flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state where the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Further, when the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e of the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the counters 173a of the high frequency support mode counter area 173 Clear the value of ~173e to "0". As a result, the ball-entering histories of the ball-entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 are initialized, and the management of the ball-entering histories can be newly started. However, it is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e of the normal counter area 171, the counters 172a to 172e of the open/close execution mode counter area 172, and the high frequency support The values of the counters 173a to 173e in the mode counter area 173 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball-entering histories of the ball-entering units 24a, 31 to 34 are accumulated over a plurality of execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the ball-entering history. Further, in this configuration, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is generated based on the reception of the history deletion signal from the hall computer HC and the generation of the deletion operation using the operation section provided in the pachinko machine 10. may be deleted.

After that, the game round restart processing is executed (step S3607). As a result, a new start of a game cycle is permitted, and when the check waiting period is started during execution of a game cycle, progress of the temporarily stopped game cycle is resumed. Specifically, the display control of the special figure display section 37a is resumed corresponding to the game round that was once stopped. In addition, the measurement of the duration of the game cycle is restarted by restarting the updating of the special figure special electric timer counter. In addition, in the process of restarting the game round, the state in which the new start of the demonstration display is prohibited is canceled. That is, the state in which the execution of step S2802 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is prohibited is released.

After that, the opening/closing execution mode is resumed (step S3608). As a result, a new start of the opening/closing execution mode is allowed, and when the check waiting period starts during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode, progress of the temporarily stopped opening/closing execution mode is resumed. Specifically, the update of the special figure special electric timer counter is resumed. Further, when the check waiting period is started while the round game is being executed, the special electric prize winning device 32 is in an open state. In this case, in the restarted round game, the upper limit duration of the open state of the special electric prize winning device 32 is not remeasured from the beginning, but measurement is restarted from the remaining upper limit duration when the round game was once stopped. do.

After that, the process of resuming normal/universal electric power control is executed (step S3609). As a result, when the start of the new fluctuation display times of the normal map display unit 38a is permitted and the check waiting period is started during the execution of the normal map normal power control, the temporarily stopped normal map normal power control progress is resumed. Specifically, when the check waiting period is started during the variable display of the normal map display unit 38a, the display control of the normal map display unit 38a is resumed, and the measurement of the duration of the variable display time is restarted. be done. In addition, when the check waiting period is started in a situation where the general electrical accessory 34a is in the open state, the general electrical accessory 34a is in the open state. In this case, the resumed open state is not measured from the beginning of the upper limit duration of the open state of the general electrical accessory 34a, but is measured from the remaining upper limit duration when the open state was once stopped. resume.

Thereafter, game ball shooting prohibition release processing is executed (step S3610). As a result, when the game ball is stored in the upper tray 55a, the shooting operation device 28 is operated to shoot the game ball, thereby returning to the state in which the game ball is shot.

Next, how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 63(a) shows the timing of outputting a check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC, FIG. 63(b) shows the execution period of the game round, and FIG. 63(c) shows the execution period of the opening/closing execution mode. , FIG. 63(d) shows the execution period of the normal/universal power control, FIG. 63(e) shows the prohibition period of shooting game balls, FIG. 63(f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. 63(g) ) indicates the display period of the check result.

First, the case where the instruction signal for starting the check is output during execution of the game times and the general/universal power control will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), the game round is being executed, and as shown in FIG. 63(d), as shown in FIG. By outputting the instruction signal to start checking from the computer HC, the game cycle is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63(b) and the normal/normal electric control is interrupted as shown in FIG. Also, at the timing t1, shooting of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63(e) and a check waiting period as shown in FIG. 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are the display contents for notifying that it is the check waiting period.

After that, at timing t2, the check waiting period ends when a fixed time T1 elapses from timing t1. At the timing of t2, calculation using the management result of the ball entry history to each ball entry section 24a, 31-34 is executed. In this case, during the time T1, after the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the shooting operation device 28, the shot game ball is placed in one of the ball entry portions 24a, 24a, 24a of the game area PA. From the longest time required for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the ball entered the ball 31 to 34 and was detected by the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the entered ball portion 24a, 31 to 34 is also set to a long enough time. Then, as already explained, the shooting of game balls is prohibited at the timing of t1. Therefore, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA will disappear before the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entry history to each of the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 will be completed before the check waiting period elapses. All are acquired.

As shown in FIG. 63(g), the check result display period starts at the timing t2. In the display period of the check result, as already explained, the display corresponding to the determination result for various parameters at normal time is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. The display corresponding to the determination results for various parameters at the time corresponds to the determination results for various parameters during the opening and closing execution mode target period executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and the high frequency support mode. A high-frequency support mode target period in which the display to be performed is executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a occurs sequentially.

After that, at timing t3, the check result display period ends as shown in FIG. 63(g) when a fixed time T2 elapses from timing t2. As a result, at the timing t3, as shown in FIG. 63(e), the state in which the shooting of the game ball is prohibited is cancelled. In addition, at the timing of t3, the game round is restarted as shown in FIG. 63(b), and the normal/universal power control is restarted as shown in FIG. 63(d).

Next, a case where an instruction signal for starting a check is output during execution of the opening/closing execution mode and normal/normal power control will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), at the timing of t4 during execution of the open/close execution mode and as shown in FIG. By outputting an instruction signal to start checking from the hall computer HC, the open/close execution mode is interrupted as shown in FIG. be. Also, at the timing of t4, shooting of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 63(e) and a check waiting period as shown in FIG. 63(f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are the display contents for notifying that it is the check waiting period.

After that, at timing t5, the check waiting period ends when a fixed time T1 elapses from timing t4. At the timing of t5, calculation using the management result of the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 is executed. This time T1 is the same as the time from timing t1 to timing t2.

As shown in FIG. 63(g), at the timing of t5, the check result display period is started. After that, at timing t6, the check result display period ends as shown in FIG. 63(g) when a fixed time T2 elapses from timing t5. This time T2 is the same as the time from timing t2 to timing t3. Also, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 63(e), the state in which the shooting of game balls is prohibited is canceled. Moreover, at the timing of t6 concerned, while opening-and-closing execution mode is restarted as shown in FIG.63(c), normal figure normal electric control is restarted as shown in FIG.63(d).

Next, the main processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, steps S3701 to S3703 and steps S3705 to S3714 are the same as steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 of the main process (FIG. 7) in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the main processing of the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S3704 that the check waiting flag or display flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1", the RAM of the power supply/firing control device 78 in step S3705 The process of step S3706 is executed without executing the process of determining whether or not the erase switch has been operated. In other words, the operation of the RAM erase switch is disabled during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As a result, when the check waiting period is started and the progress of the game is stopped, the manager of the game hall misunderstands that the situation is due to the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10, and initializes the main side RAM 65.例文帳に追加To prevent the clear processing of the main side RAM 65 from being executed even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clear processing (step S3709). becomes possible. It should be noted that the main side RAM 65 is supplied with electric power for memory retention from the power failure time power supply unit of the power supply/launch control device 78 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state in the same manner as in the first embodiment. supplied.

On the other hand, even if "1" is set in the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main RAM 65, the processing of steps S3706 to S3708 is executed. That is, even during the check waiting period or the check result display period, if the power failure flag is not set to "1" (step S3706: NO), the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S3709). Also when the checksum calculation result is abnormal (step S3708: NO), the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S3709). As a result, when the power failure processing is not executed normally or when some abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, the clear processing of the main RAM 65 is executed even during the check waiting period or the check result display period. Then, the main RAM 65 can be initialized.

Next, the contents of the effect execution control and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described.

First, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for the game cycle is executed will be described. FIG. 65 is a view showing individual symbols that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(j), the patterns, which are one type of pattern, consist of nine main patterns with numbers "1" to "9", and shell-shaped patterns. It is composed of a sub pattern consisting of. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), the pattern display device 41 is provided with three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower rows as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, 9 types of main patterns "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-design is arranged between each main design. . In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1" A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the upper part, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. In the symbol display device 41, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), in the pattern display device 41, standby areas SA1 to SA9 are set so that three patterns are displayed for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. A total of 9 patterns are displayed at the same time. Incidentally, each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, respectively, and when the symbols are finally stopped and displayed, the symbols waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are stopped at the respective stop positions. Is displayed. Also, in the pattern display device 41, five effective lines are set so as to connect the three standby areas SA1 to SA9, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and an upward right line L5. It is Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of upper symbol row Z1→lower symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2, and all symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines. When the fluctuation display of ~Z3 is completed, a big win moving image is displayed as a low-probability big win result or a maximum profit big win result. In the pachinko machine 10, main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when the maximum winning result occurs, the same specific symbols are used. The combination is displayed frozen. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when a low-probability jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. be done.

In addition, when the result is a low winning/high probability jackpot, a combination of predetermined symbols, which is not the same combination of symbols, is stopped and displayed. In addition, the pattern display device 41 may arbitrarily display the patterns in any manner without being limited to the above. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

In more detail about the contents of the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, when the effect for the game round is started, the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in high-speed variable display, which is a low identification mode. After that, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched in a predetermined order to the low-speed variation display, which is a high identification mode, and the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the predetermined order. The pattern is displayed on standby. In the state where the symbols are standby-displayed in each of the standby areas of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are oscillatingly displayed over the oscillating display period, and then the symbols are statically displayed as the final stop display. and the still display state is continued over the final stop period. In this case, the oscillating display means that the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 oscillate within the same standby areas SA1 to SA9, and each symbol is displayed in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9. In addition, each symbol swings in a range including the corresponding stop position. By performing the static display after the oscillating display in this manner, when the symbols are finally statically displayed, the symbols are displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are oscillated in the standby areas SA1 to SA9. It is possible to perform a step-by-step display such as static display, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the pattern is finally displayed statically.

When the display control device 82 receives a variation pattern command from the sound and light side CPU 163, the data table corresponding to the variation pattern command is read from the ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 82, and the pattern display device is displayed according to the data table. 41 display control is executed. In this case, this data table corresponds to the duration of the current game cycle, and by executing the display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, high-speed fluctuation display → low-speed fluctuation display in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Display→standby display→still display is performed. That is, the command for recognizing the switching timing from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, the switching timing from the low-speed fluctuation display to the standby display, the switching timing from the standby display to the still display, and the end timing of the still display is display control. Not sent to device 82 . This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the sound and light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 . Further, when static display is started in the symbol display device 41, final stop display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the current game cycle is also started in the special symbol display section 37a. At the start of , the main side CPU 63 does not transmit a corresponding command to the sound and light side CPU 163 . This makes it possible to reduce the number of commands transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound and light CPU 163 .

It should be noted that, in a situation where the standby display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 and the low speed fluctuation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols that are variably displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are different. A ready-to-win effect using a character image may be executed. Since the start timing and end timing of this ready-to-win effect are also defined in the data table, there is no need to transmit a command from the sound/light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 at the start and end of the ready-to-win effect.

In the pattern display device 41, as shown in FIG. 66(b), a reserved display area Ga is set in the lower center. The pending display area Ga is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit pending display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3, and Ga4 as the maximum number of pending information stored in the pending area RE are arranged side by side. there is Specifically, the maximum number of pending information is four. Ga3 and a fourth unit reserved display area Ga4 are set. When the number of pieces of pending information stored in the pending area RE is one, a predetermined pending image is displayed only in the first unit pending display area Ga1, and the pending information stored in the pending area RE is displayed. is two, the predetermined suspension image is displayed only in the first unit suspension display area Ga1 and the second unit suspension display area Ga2, and the number of suspension information stored in the suspension area RE is In the case of three, a predetermined suspension image is displayed only in the first unit suspension display area Ga1, the second unit suspension display area Ga2, and the third unit suspension display area Ga3, and is stored in the suspension area RE. When the number of pending information is four, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Ga1 to the fourth unit pending display area Ga4. Number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which a predetermined hold image is displayed by transmitting a command corresponding to the acquisition command from the sound and light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 when the hold information is acquired increases. In addition, when a new game round is started, a command corresponding to the shift command is transmitted from the sound and light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82, so that a predetermined holding image is displayed in the unit holding display area Ga1. The number of ~Ga4 decreases.

Next, the details of the effect execution control during the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described.

As already explained, when the check waiting period starts, the main CPU 63 transmits a check start command to the sound and light CPU 163 in step S3412 of the check processing (FIG. 59). Then, when the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it sets the end standby state by setting "1" to the end standby flag of the sound and light side RAM 165 in step S2912 of the effect control processing (FIG. 53). . Also, a check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82 in step S2913.

When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the symbol display device 41 displays a notification image Gr indicating a check waiting period or a check result display period. FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the pattern display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIGS. 67( a ) and 67 ( b ), the notification image Gr “checking” is displayed at the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the pattern display device 41 . As a result, the player who pays attention to the symbol display device 41 can recognize that the current state is the check waiting period or the check result display period by confirming the notification image Gr. FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b) show the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the game round effect is being executed. Also, the notification image Gr is displayed on the pattern display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As a result, not only the situation in which the effect for the game cycle is being executed, but also during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode and during the execution of the demonstration effect, the symbol indicates that it is the check waiting period or the check result display period. It is possible to perform this operation on the display device 41 . Note that the content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary, and for example, the above notification may be performed by dimming the entire pattern display device 41 .

When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, it executes not only the processing for displaying the notification image Gr on the pattern display device 41 but also the processing for continuing the execution of the display effect. Specifically, when a check display command is received in a situation where a demonstration effect is being executed, the display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image display for the demonstration effect.

When the command for check display is received before the start of the final stop period in the effect for the game cycle during execution of the effect for the game cycle, the timing for starting the swing display in the effect for the current game cycle. Until then, the display control of the pattern display device 41 is executed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the sound and light side CPU 163 at the start of the effect for this game round, but after the swing display is started. continues the swinging display even when the timing for starting the still display in the data table comes.

With reference to FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), a description will be given of how the pattern display device 41 executes the game-turn effect during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIG. 67(a), in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the display area where the symbols are variably displayed and a position that does not overlap the reserved display area Ga , a notification image Gr is displayed to indicate that it is a check waiting period or a check result display period. After that, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the symbols are oscillatingly displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed so as to oscillate in the vertical direction different from the horizontal direction, which is the variation direction of the symbols, within the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. This swing display is continued even when the original static display is started.

When the command for check display is received during the final stop period of the performance for the game round, the display of the pattern display device 41 is controlled so that the state of static display of the pattern is continued. When the check display command is received during the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of the pattern display device 41 is controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image display during the opening period. In the opening/closing execution mode, when the check display command is received in the opening/closing period in which the special electric prize winning device 32 is repeatedly opened/closed, the pattern display device 41 is displayed and controlled so as to repeat a series of moving image display in the opening/closing period. When the check display command is received during the ending period of the opening/closing execution mode, the display of the pattern display device 41 is controlled so as to repeat a series of operation displays during the ending period.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 is in the end standby state, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the effect control processing (FIG. 53). In this case, it is determined whether or not any effect command has been received from the main CPU 63 in step S2915. The effect command is a command sent from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 in order to instruct the start timing of the effect, and specifically corresponds to a demonstration start command, a variation command, an opening command, and an ending command.

If any effect command has been received (step S2915: YES), the end standby flag of the sound and light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S2916). As a result, the end standby state is released. After that, various effects determination processing at the time of canceling the end standby is executed (step S2917). In the various effect determination processing at the time of termination standby cancellation, if the command received this time is a demonstration start command, the demonstration effect determination processing of step S2903 is executed, and if the command received this time is a variation command, the game of step S2906 If the command received this time is the opening command, the effect determination process for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in step S2909, and if the command received this time is the ending command, the corresponding effect is determined. Execute the process.

After that, if the end standby state that has ended this time occurs during execution of the effect for the game round and the standby display is performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 (step S2918: YES ), the process for final stop is executed (step S2919). When the sound and light side CPU 163 performs execution control of the effect for the game round, the data table is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 as described above. Data indicating the timing at which the standby display is started in the execution period of the effect for the game round is set.

In the final stop process, before the effect determined in step S2917, the contents of the effect are adjusted so that the symbol is statically displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the data table for the final stop period is read out as the data table for controlling the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and after control based on the data table for the final stop period is executed, step S2917 is executed. The control based on the data table corresponding to the content of the performance determined in is executed.

After that, command transmission processing at the time of canceling the waiting for completion is executed (step S2920). In the command transmission process, if the present situation is to start the demonstration effect, a demonstration start command is sent to the display control device 82, and if this time is the situation to start the game effect, a decision is made. A variation pattern command corresponding to the content of the produced performance is transmitted to the display control device 82, and when the opening/closing execution mode should be started this time, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82, and the opening/closing execution is executed this time. An ending command is sent to the display controller 82 when the situation is such that the ending period of the mode should be started.

If the display control device 82 is not in a situation where the swinging display of the symbols is continued as an effect for the game cycle, the display control device 82 controls the execution of the display effect in the symbol display device 41 in response to the reception of each command described above. I do. On the other hand, when the display control device 82 receives each of the above commands in a situation where the swinging display of the symbols is continued as an effect for the game round (specifically, the demo start command, the variation command or the opening command is received ), each pattern that is being oscillatingly displayed is statically displayed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec), and then the display effect corresponding to the received command is started. In this case, when the display effect to be executed after the final stop period is a display effect whose execution period is fixed, such as the effect for the game round and the effect for the opening period, the final stop period is generated first. , the execution period of the display performance to be executed thereafter is shortened by the final stop period.

Specifically, if the display effect to be executed after the final stop period is the effect for the game round, the period during which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed with high speed fluctuation is shortened by the final stop period. As a result, it is possible to generate a final stop period before starting a new game round effect while suppressing the influence of the game round effect on the appearance.

Also, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is the effect of the opening period, the timing of starting the effect of the opening period is delayed by the final stop period. In the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, the effect in the opening/closing period is started as it is after the effect in the opening period ends, but in the effect in the opening/closing period, a series of moving image display is repeated. Therefore, even if the end timing of the presentation in the opening period interrupts after the start of the opening/closing period, the effect on the appearance of the presentation for the opening/closing execution mode is small.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When a ball enters the ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34 as a predetermined event, the values of the corresponding counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, 173a to 173e are incremented by 1, and the information on the ball entering history is obtained. It is stored in various counters 171a-171e, 172a-172e, and 173a-173e. Then, predetermined parameters are derived as computation results by executing computations using the information stored in the various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e, and information of the derived computation results. is reported. As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the entry history of the game balls into the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. In addition, since the information on the entry history is stored in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to and unauthorized alteration of the information on the entry history. In this case, the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are derived using information on the history of entering a ball. As a result, various parameters can be derived in situations different from those in which normal games are played. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallelize the progress of the normal game and the derivation of various parameters, and the processing load can be reduced.

In a situation where various parameters are derived, the progress of the game is restricted by restricting the execution of at least some of the processes for progressing the game. This makes it possible to prevent the number of processes per unit time from increasing excessively in situations where various parameters are derived.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, the calculation is performed after the shooting of the game ball is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the entry of game balls into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, which triggers the variation of various parameters, is restricted.

When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, after the game ball launch is restricted, until the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 enters the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34. Various parameters are calculated after a period longer than the longest period assumed as the period required for the calculation. As a result, it is possible to calculate various parameters in a situation in which game balls do not reliably enter the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34, which is a trigger for varying various parameters.

In a situation where information is set to indicate that it is a situation in which various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history and the calculation result is notified (that is, if the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main side RAM 65 is "1" is set), even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON/OFF while the RAM erase switch is ON, the clearing process of the main side RAM 65 (step S3709) is blocked. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated, even if the clear operation is erroneously performed in an attempt to release the restricted situation, the main side RAM 65 is cleared. It is possible to prevent the processing from being executed.

When the main processing (FIG. 64) is executed in a state where the power failure flag is not set to "1" even in the situation where the execution of the clear processing of the main RAM 65 is blocked in response to the clear operation as described above. Also, when a checksum abnormality occurs, clear processing of the main RAM 65 is executed. As a result, even when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated, it is possible to leave room for executing the clear processing of the main side RAM 65 .

The state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated using the history of entering balls is canceled when a predetermined display period of the check results has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the progress of the game is left in a restricted state.

Even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated using the entering history, the execution of the effect in the pattern display device 41 is continued. As a result, even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs while the player is playing the game and the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to prevent the production from ending immediately, thereby preventing the game from being terminated immediately. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

When the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of an opportunity to calculate various parameters in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is being executed on the pattern display device 41, it should be the opportunity to end the performance for the game cycle. Even if the continuation period of the game round has passed, the control for ending the effect for the game round is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to continue the effect for the game cycle, and even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation of deriving various parameters, the effect It is possible to make the player think that the execution of is continued.

In a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the state in which the effect for the game cycle is continued is a command for starting a new effect such as a command for variation, an opening command, and a command to start a demonstration. Canceled when transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 . As a result, it is possible to cancel the state in which the effect for the game cycle is continued without transmitting a dedicated command from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 .

When continuing the effect for the game cycle in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, when the effect for the game cycle is terminated, the standby display of the previous stage where the symbols are stopped and displayed continues. be done. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to recognize the stop result of the symbols, and to continue the effect for the game cycle in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the effect for the game cycle is to be terminated, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the effect for the game cycle in response to the cancellation of the restriction on the progress of the game.

When the performance for the game cycle is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to calculate various parameters, the notification corresponding to it is also executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the continuation of the performance for the game cycle longer than expected.

Information corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the entry history is sent to the special figure display unit 37a in which the variation display of the special figure is performed and the normal figure display unit 38a in which the variation display of the normal figure is performed. is executed. As a result, it is possible to use the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a as the display unit for performing the notification, and it is possible to simplify the configuration compared to the configuration in which a dedicated display unit is provided. becomes.

When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, the special figure display in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display in the general figure display unit 38a is interrupted. Thereby, it becomes possible to clarify the notification contents in the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

In addition, when the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters using the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is completed, the display content of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is started. The display content immediately before the display is restored. Thereby, it becomes possible to restart the display of the special figure in the special figure display section 37a and the display of the general figure in the general figure display section 38a after the end of the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters.

When the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, the display mode used when displaying the special figure with respect to the special figure display unit 37a is the above various parameters As for the normal map display section 38a, the display mode used for displaying the normal map is not used as the display mode of the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall clearly grasp that the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters is executed using the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a.

When the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a, the contents of the notification target of different types are sequentially switched and displayed. This makes it possible to display the contents of different types of notification targets using the same display units 37a and 38a.

<Another form of the thirteenth embodiment>
・When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history to the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34, the game ball is prohibited from being launched, but the game ball is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the emission of is not prohibited. In this case, when an instruction signal to start checking is received, by configuring various parameters to be calculated using the ball entry history information at that time, even if the shooting of the game ball is continued thereafter, Various parameters can be calculated without being affected by it.

・Limited to the configuration in which the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a are the devices that perform notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the history of ball entry to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 Instead, the display light-emitting portion 53 provided on the front door frame 14 may be used in common, or a dedicated display portion may be provided. By executing the notification using the display light-emitting portion 53 provided on the front door frame 14, it is possible to easily confirm the content of the notification. Further, by executing the notification using the dedicated display unit, the device for executing the notification becomes clear to the manager of the game hall.

In addition, in the configuration in which the notification is executed using a dedicated display unit, when an opportunity such as reception of an instruction signal to start checking occurs, the history of ball entry into the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is used. Then, various parameters are calculated to update the notification content of the calculation result, and the notification based on the updated notification content may be continued until the next update is performed. As a result, by checking the dedicated display section at any timing, it is possible to grasp the content of notification corresponding to the immediately preceding calculation result. Also, the dedicated display unit may be configured so that its display surface is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52, and is provided in the board box of the main controller 60. It is good also as a structure with.

The trigger for executing calculations using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is not limited to receiving an instruction signal to start checking from the hall computer HC of the game hall. The opportunity may be generated every time a predetermined time elapses, or the opportunity may be generated every time the total period of the game ball shooting period reaches the predetermined period. Alternatively, the trigger may be generated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, or the trigger may be generated when the supply of the operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Alternatively, the opportunity may be generated when the demonstration effect continues for a predetermined period or more, or the opportunity may be generated when a predetermined operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10 is operated, The trigger may be generated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started while a predetermined operation unit is operated.

In the above embodiment, the game ball payout is not stopped when the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entering units 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. It is good also as a structure stopped.

The display light-emitting unit 53 provides effects such as effects for game rounds, effects for open/close execution mode, demonstration effects, etc. , the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41 continue as they are, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be temporarily interrupted. In this case, when the notification of the calculation result is finished, the effect is restarted from the temporarily interrupted state.

In a configuration in which calculations using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 and notification of the calculation results are performed in a control section separate from the main side CPU 63 as in the first embodiment, Alternatively, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 may be stopped in a situation where the computation and the notification of the computation result are executed. Even in this case, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in the situation where the calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed.

・When the RTC is installed in the main side CPU 63 and the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the business hours of the game hall, even if a game ball enters the ball entry section 24a, 31-34. It may be configured such that it is not reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, for example, even if the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is intended to be an intentional result outside the business hours of the game hall, it is possible to disable it.

・Even if a game ball enters the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 under the condition that the game ball is not launched, it may not be reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, when the action of cleaning the game balls in the ball-entering sections 24a, 31-34 is performed, it is possible to prevent it from being reflected in the ball-entering history.

・The progress of the game is restricted before the calculation using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is started, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which these occur at the same time, and the calculation is not executed. The progress of the game may be restricted at the timing when the calculation result is notified after that without restricting the progress of the game at the timing when the calculation result is notified.

The state in which the progress of the game is restricted due to the execution of calculations using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is canceled due to a factor different from the elapse of the check result display period. It may be configured to be For example, it may be configured to be released when an instruction signal to end the check is received from the hall computer HC of the game hall, or may be configured to be released by operating an operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10 .

・In the situation where the effect for the game round is being executed on the symbol display device 41, if there is an opportunity to execute the calculation using the history of the ball entering the ball entering units 24a, 31 to 34, the game round in the middle of the execution It is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for the next game is waited in the standby display state.

・When the performance for the open/close execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41, if there is an opportunity to execute an operation using the history of the ball entering the ball entering section 24a, 31 to 34, the opening/closing operation is performed during execution. It is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for the run mode is continued, and may be temporarily interrupted at that point.

・In a configuration where the progress of the game is restricted when it is detected that a fraudulent act has occurred, even if a configuration is applied in which the execution of the effect is continued even when the progress of the game is restricted. good. In addition, in the configuration in which the progress of the game is restricted when the state of the pachinko machine 10 reaches a predetermined state, a configuration is applied in which the performance is continued even when the progress of the game is restricted. You may

In the configuration where the final stop command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 at the end of the effect for the game round, the final stop command is sent to the main side while the standby display is continued on the symbol display device 41. It may be configured such that it is canceled based on transmission from the CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 . Even in this case, there is no need to transmit a dedicated command for canceling the state in which the standby display is continued on the pattern display device 41 from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 .

A configuration may be adopted in which the values of various parameters calculated as a result of calculation using the history of ball entry into the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are reported as they are. This enables the manager of the gaming hall to grasp various parameters in detail.

・In addition to or instead of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, the result of calculation using the history of entering the ball into the entrance part 24a, 31 to 34 or the information corresponding thereto, the pattern display device 41 may be the configuration displayed. This makes it easier for the manager of the game hall to grasp the calculation result.

<Fourteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the thirteenth embodiment in the mode from the reception of the check start instruction signal to the start of the check waiting period. The configuration that is different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing check processing in this embodiment.

If it is neither the check result display period nor the check waiting period (steps S3801 and S3802: NO), it is determined whether or not the end trigger waiting flag provided in the main RAM 65 is set to "1" ( step S3803). The end opportunity waiting flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is in a state of waiting for the start of the check waiting period after receiving the check start instruction signal.

If the end trigger waiting flag is not set to "1" (step S3803: NO), on condition that an instruction signal to start checking has been received from the hall computer HC (step S3804: YES), the game round is currently running. It is determined whether or not during execution of opening and closing execution mode, or during execution of normal figure normal electric control (step S3805). If the current game round is being executed, the open/close execution mode is being executed, or the general/universal electric power control is being executed (step S3805: YES), the end trigger waiting flag of the main side RAM 65 is set to "1". (Step S3806). As a result, an end opportunity waiting period for waiting for the start of the check waiting period is set. On the other hand, if the present is neither during the execution of the game round, during the open/close execution mode, nor during the execution of the normal/universal power control (step S3805: NO), the processing of steps S3809 to S3814 is executed. Also, if the end trigger waiting flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and it is the end trigger waiting period (step S3803: YES), the game is currently being executed, the open/close execution mode is being executed, and the Under the condition that no electrical control is being executed (step S3807: NO), after clearing the termination trigger waiting flag of the main RAM 65 to "0" and ending the termination trigger waiting period (step S3808), step The processing of steps S3809 to S3814 is executed.

In details of the processing of steps S3809 to S3814, first, game ball shooting prohibition processing is executed (step S3809) in the same manner as step S3404 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, as in step S3408 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, the storage processing of the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3810), In the same way as the step S3409 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the 13th embodiment, the check waiting display start processing of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a is executed (step S3811). In addition, as in step S3410 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, the check waiting counter is set (step S3812), and the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment is executed. 59), the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" (step S3813), and the check is started in the same manner as step S3412 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. A command is transmitted to the sound and light side CPU 163 (step S3814). This starts the check waiting period.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the game round, during the opening and closing execution mode, or when receiving a check start instruction signal during the execution of the general power control, wait for the start of the check waiting period, the game round The check waiting period is started when it is no longer in execution, in the open/close execution mode, or in the normal/universal power control. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity and the processing load, since it is not necessary to execute processing for interrupting these situations and then restoring them. In addition, since it is not necessary to interrupt each situation in this way, in the present embodiment, at the start of the check waiting period, the interruption processing of the game cycle (step S3405) and the interruption of the opening/closing execution mode as in the thirteenth embodiment are performed. Processing (step S3406), and interruption processing (step S3407) of the normal map normal electric control are not executed.

When the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 is set to "1" and the check waiting period has started, affirmative determination is made in step S3802 of the check processing, and the check waiting processing is executed in step S3815. The contents of the check waiting process are the same as the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. In addition, when the check waiting process is executed and the check waiting period is switched to the check result display period, an affirmative determination is made in step S3801 of the check process, and the check result display process is performed in step S3816. to run.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing processing during display of check results.

In the check result display process, first, the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is subtracted by 1 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the on-display counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S3902).

If the value of the counter being displayed is not "0" (step S3902: NO), any one of the normal target period, opening/closing execution mode target period, and high-frequency support mode target period is included in the check result display period. It is determined whether or not it is time to end and switch to the next target period (step S3903). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, display content update processing is executed (step S3904). In the update process, the special figure display unit 37a and the normal display unit 37a are changed so that the display contents correspond to the next target period for the current target period among the normal target period, the opening/closing execution mode target period, and the high-frequency support mode target period. It controls the display of the figure display section 38a. The processing contents of these steps S3903 and S3904 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3603 and S3604 of the check result displaying process (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment.

When it is determined that the value of the counter during display of the main side RAM65 is "0" at step S3902, the special figure display in the same manner as step S3605 during display of the check result in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 62) Display return processing of the unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is executed (step S3905). After that, the display flag of the main RAM 65 is cleared to "0" (step S3906). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state where the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. After that, similarly to step S3610 of the process during display of the check result (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment, the game ball shooting inhibition cancellation process is executed (step S3907).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 70, how the end opportunity waiting period, the check waiting period, and the check result display period progress will be described. FIG. 70(a) shows the timing of outputting the instruction signal to start checking from the hall computer HC, FIG. 70(b) shows the execution period of the game cycle, and FIG. , FIG. 70(d) shows the game ball shooting prohibition period, FIG. 70(e) shows the end trigger waiting period, FIG. 70(f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. 70(g) Indicates the display period of the check result.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), at the timing of t1 during execution of the game cycle, the hole computer HC outputs an instruction signal to start checking as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, the game cycle continues without interruption at the timing of t1. Also, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t2, which is during execution of the game round, the general pattern general electric control is started as shown in FIG. 70(c). And, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the game round ends at the timing of t3 during execution of the normal/universal electric power control. However, the end opportunity waiting period continues because the normal map normal power control is still being executed.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the normal/universal power control ends. As a result, it becomes a situation that is not during the execution of the game round, during the opening and closing execution mode, and during the execution of the normal diagram normal electric control. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 70(e) and 70(f), the end trigger waiting period shifts to the check waiting period. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display section 37a and the normal figure display section 38a are the display contents for notifying that it is the check waiting period. Also, at the timing of t4, shooting of game balls is prohibited as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at timing t5, the check waiting period ends when a fixed time T1 elapses from timing t4. At the timing of t5, calculation of various parameters using the history of ball entry into each of the ball entry sections 24a, 31-34 is executed. In this case, during the time T1, after the game ball is shot from the game ball shooting mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the shooting operation device 28, the shot game ball is placed in one of the ball entry portions 24a, 24a, 24a of the game area PA. From the longest time required for the main side CPU 63 to specify that the ball entered the ball 31 to 34 and was detected by the ball entering detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the entered ball portion 24a, 31 to 34 is also set to a long enough time. Then, as already explained, the shooting of game balls is prohibited at the timing of t4. Therefore, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA will disappear before the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entry history to each of the ball entering sections 24a, 31 to 34 will be completed before the check waiting period elapses. All are acquired.

As shown in FIG. 70(g), the check result display period starts at the timing t5. In the display period of the check result, as already explained, the display corresponding to the determination result for various parameters at normal time is performed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. The display corresponding to the determination results for various parameters at the time corresponds to the determination results for various parameters during the opening and closing execution mode target period executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a, and the high frequency support mode. A high-frequency support mode target period in which the display to be performed is executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a occurs sequentially.

After that, at timing t6, the check result display period ends as shown in FIG. 70(g) when a fixed time T2 elapses from timing t5. As a result, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the state in which the shooting of the game ball is prohibited is cancelled.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in a situation in which specific operations such as game rounds, open/close execution mode, and general/universal electrical control are being performed in the pachinko machine 10, there is a trigger for calculating various parameters using the ball entry history. Even if it occurs, the progress of the game is not restricted. As a result, it becomes possible not to hinder the execution of the game machine, the open/close execution mode, and the general pattern general electrical control due to the occurrence of the calculation trigger of various parameters.

When a trigger for calculating various parameters occurs in a situation in which any one of the game round, open/close execution mode, and general/universal electric control is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the specific operation to be executed is completed. The progress of the game is restricted later. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the occurrence of a trigger for calculating various parameters, while preventing the execution of the specific action from being hindered.

While the game is being played, the progress of the game is not restricted even if an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs. As a result, various parameters can be calculated under conditions where the progress of the game is restricted while the game is not interrupted.

In the situation where the opening/closing execution mode is being performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the calculation trigger of various parameters occurs. As a result, various parameters can be calculated under conditions where the progress of the game is restricted while the opening/closing execution mode is not interrupted.

When the special electric prize winning device 32 is open during the opening/closing execution mode, the execution of calculations using the history of ball entry into the ball entering portions 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction on the progress of the game are put on standby, and the opening/closing is executed. Even in the mode, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 and the restriction on the progress of the game may not be put on standby. .

<Fifteenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, management of ball entry history to each ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34, calculation using the management result, and notification of the calculation result are executed by the sound and light side CPU 163 instead of the main side CPU 63. This is different from the thirteenth embodiment in this respect. The configuration that is different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 provided in the MPU 162 of the sound emission control device 81. As shown in FIG. The MPU 162 is provided with an input port for receiving commands from the main CPU 63 in addition to the input port 201 .

The input port 201 is provided with a plurality of buffers 202a-202g. Specifically, first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g through signal paths 203a to 203g, and each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g is a signal to be input. is LOW level, information of "0" is stored as the first data, and information of "1" is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at HI level. Note that the relationship between these LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning hole detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the first signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, and one game is detected by the first winning hole detection sensor 42a. A first signal of HI level is output for a specific period when a ball is detected. This specified period is sufficient for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that the first signal of HI level is input to the first buffer 202a.

A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning hole detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the second signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a, and one game is detected by the second winning hole detection sensor 43a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a second signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that the second signal of HI level is input to the second buffer 202b.

A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third winning hole detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the third signal of LOW level in a situation where the new game ball is not detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a, and one game is detected by the third winning hole detection sensor 44a. When a ball is detected, it outputs a third signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 202c.

A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electric detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level fourth signal when no new game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a, and when one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a. to output a fourth signal of HI level over a specific period. This specified period is a period sufficient for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that the fourth signal of HI level is input to the fourth buffer 202d.

A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level fifth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a, and one game is detected by the first operation opening detection sensor 46a. When the ball is detected, a HI level fifth signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that the fifth signal of HI level is input to the fifth buffer 202e.

A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second operation port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 202f. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs a LOW level sixth signal in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a, and one game is detected by the second operation opening detection sensor 47a. When the ball is detected, it outputs a sixth signal of HI level for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that the sixth signal of HI level is input to the sixth buffer 202f.

A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 202g. In this case, the main side CPU 63 outputs the LOW level seventh signal in a situation where no new game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a. In this case, a HI level seventh signal is output for a specific period. This specified period is sufficient for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 202g.

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence relation area 204 provided in the sound and light side ROM 164. As shown in FIG. In the correspondence relation area 204, the first to seventh correspondence relation areas 204a to 204a correspond to the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g provided in the input port 201 of the MPU 162 of the sound emission control device 81 one-to-one. 204g is provided.

In the first correspondence relationship area 204a, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 202a by the sound and light side CPU 163, information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is the general winning hole 31 is displayed. is pre-stored in In addition, in the first correspondence area 204a, information indicating that the game ball is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31 are displayed. It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the second correspondence area 204b, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 202b by the sound and light side CPU 163, information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 is displayed. is pre-stored in In addition, in the second correspondence area 204b, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the third correspondence area 204c, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 202c by the sound and light side CPU 163, information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is being shipped is the general winning hole 31. is pre-stored in In addition, in the third correspondence area 204c, there is information indicating that it is the general winning hole 31 and information (10) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general winning hole 31. It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped.

In the fourth correspondence area 204d, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 202d by the sound and light side CPU 163, information indicating that it is the special electric winning device 32 is displayed. is pre-stored in In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 204d, there is information indicating that it is the special electric prize winning device 32 and information (15 pieces) of the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electric prize winning device 32. It is stored in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. In the fifth correspondence area 204e, as information for identifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 202e by the sound and light side CPU 163, information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is shipped as the first working opening 33 is displayed. Pre-stored in stages. In addition, in the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that it is the first operation port 33 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 (one ) is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 . In the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating that it is the second working opening 34 is displayed as information for identifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 202f by the sound and light side CPU 163. Pre-stored in stages. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating that it is the second operation port 34 and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 (one ) is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 . In the seventh correspondence area 204g, as information for specifying the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 202g by the management side CPU 112, information indicating that it is the outlet 24a is stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. stored.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the check process (step S2706) is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), but the check process is not executed in this embodiment. In addition, accompanying this, in step S2707 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51), not only it is determined whether or not the game is stopped, but also it is configured to determine whether or not it is the display period of the check result. However, in the present embodiment, although the judgment as to whether or not the game is stopped is executed, the judgment as to whether or not it is the display period of the check result is not executed. Also, in the entering ball detection process in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the same process as the entering ball detection process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is executed. In this embodiment, in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51), management output processing is executed as processing subsequent to external information setting processing in step S2719.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. FIG.

First, "7" is set in the managed counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S4001). The managed object counter specifies by the main side CPU 63 that there is a managed object for which it has not been specified whether or not to change the signal output state to the sound and light side CPU 163 in the current management output process. In addition, it is a counter for the main side CPU 63 to specify whether or not to change the signal output state to the sound and light side CPU 163 for any managed object. In one management output process, the management targets for which the main side CPU 63 determines whether or not to change the signal output state to the sound and light side CPU 163 are the seven incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. is. Therefore, the managed counter is first set to "7".

After that, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the sound and light side CPU 163 for the managed object corresponding to the current managed object counter value is HI level (step S4002). If it is not HI level (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether or not the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S4003). Specifically, when the value of the managed counter is "7" and corresponds to the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not the first output flag is set to "1", When the value of the managed counter is "6" and corresponds to the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not the second output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is determined. is "5" and corresponds to the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not the third output flag is set to "1", and the value of the managed counter is "4". If it corresponds to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not the fourth output flag is set to "1", the value of the managed counter is "3", and the first operation opening detection sensor 46a , it is determined whether or not the fifth output flag is set to "1". If the sixth output flag is set to "1" or not, and if the value of the managed counter is "1" and corresponds to the output port 24a, the seventh output flag is set to " 1” is set. These first to seventh output flags are set to "1" in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10), as in the first embodiment.

If the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to "1" (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals is set to HI level. (step S4004). After that, the output flag corresponding to the value of the managed counter is cleared to "0" (step S4005).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S4006). Specifically, whether the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter among the first to seventh signals was switched from LOW level to HI level. determine whether or not This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of history setting processing (to be described later) for executing monitoring of the input port 201 in the sound and light side CPU 163. This is a period in which the sound and light side CPU 163 can reliably specify the output state of . If there is an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter to LOW level (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the managed counter is set to LOW level ( step S4007).

When a negative determination is made in step S4003, when the process of step S4005 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S4006, or when the process of step S4007 is executed, the value of the managed counter in the main RAM 65 is set to 1. Subtract (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the managed counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S4009). If the value of the managed object counter is 1 or more (step S4009: NO), the process from step S4002 onwards is executed for the managed object corresponding to the new value of the managed object counter.

Next, the effect control processing of this embodiment executed by the sound/light side CPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the effect control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (eg, 4 msec).

When the sound and light side CPU 163 has received an opening command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4101: YES), it sets the opening/closing execution mode flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4102). The opening/closing execution mode flag is a flag for specifying the opening/closing execution mode by the sound/light side CPU 163 . Thereafter, effect setting processing for the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4103). In the effect setting process for the opening/closing execution mode, the data table for the opening/closing execution mode is read from the sound/light side ROM 164 to the sound/light side RAM 165 . Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 . Also, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82 . When the display control device 82 receives the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 has received the ending command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4104: YES), the open/close execution mode flag of the sound and light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4105). Thereafter, an effect setting process for ending is executed (step S4106). In the effect setting process for the ending, the data table for the ending is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 . Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 . Also, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82 . By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the high frequency start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4107: YES), it sets the high frequency support flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4108). The high frequency start command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 when the high frequency support mode is started. Further, the high-frequency support flag is a flag for specifying the high-frequency support mode in the sound and light side CPU 163 . After that, an effect setting process for high-frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the effect setting process for the high-frequency support, the data table for the high-frequency support mode is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 . Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, an effect for the high-frequency support mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 . Also, a high-frequency start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the high frequency start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect for the high frequency support mode is executed.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 has received the high frequency end command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4110: YES), the sound and light side CPU 163 clears the high frequency support flag of the sound and light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4111). The high-frequency end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the high-frequency support mode ends. Thereafter, effect setting processing for low-frequency support is executed (step S4112). In the effect setting process for the low frequency support, the data table for the low frequency support mode is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 . Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, an effect for the low-frequency support mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 . Also, a high-frequency end command is transmitted to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the high-frequency end command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the display effect for the low-frequency support mode is executed.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 receives the door open command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4113: YES), it sets the door open flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 to "1" (step S4114). The door open command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from the closed state to the open state. Further, the open door flag is a flag for specifying that the front door frame 14 is in the open state by the sound and light side CPU 163 . Thereafter, notification start processing is executed (step S4115). In the notification start process, the data table for door open notification is read from the sound and light side ROM 164 to the sound and light side RAM 165 . Then, light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and sound output control of the speaker unit 54 are executed according to the data table. As a result, a notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is performed by the display light-emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 . It also transmits a door open command to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the door open command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so as to notify that the front door frame 14 is open.

When the sound and light side CPU 163 has received the door closing command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4116: YES), the sound and light side CPU 163 clears the door open flag of the sound and light side RAM 165 to "0" (step S4117). The door closing command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from the open state to the closed state. After that, notification end processing is executed (step S4118). In the notification end processing, the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state by the display light emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 is terminated. It also transmits a door closing command to the display control device 82 . Upon receiving the door closing command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is terminated.

Then, after executing history setting processing in step S4119 and executing checking processing in step S4120, other processing is executed in step S4121. In other processing, processing such as when a variation command and a type command are received from the main side CPU 63 is executed.

Next, the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) will be described.

First, the normal counter area 211, open/close execution mode counter area 212, and high frequency support mode counter area 213 provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. Each of these areas 211 to 213 includes first counters 211a, 212a, 213a, second counters 211b, 212b, 213b, third counters 211c, 212c, 213c, fourth counters 211d, 212d, 213d, and a fifth counter. 211e, 212e, 213e, sixth counters 211f, 212f, 213f, and seventh counters 211g, 212g, 213g are provided. The first counters 211a, 212a, and 213a store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a is changed from LOW level to HI level. The second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b is changed from LOW level to HI level. The third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d store information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is changed from LOW level to HI level. The fifth counters 211e, 212e, and 213e store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e is changed from LOW level to HI level. The sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is changed from LOW level to HI level. The seventh counters 211g, 212g, and 213g store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has changed from LOW level to HI level.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound and light side CPU 163. FIG.

In the history setting process, when "1" is set in the open door flag of the sound and light side RAM 165, that is, when the front door frame 14 is open (step S4201: YES), the normal history setting process is performed. (Step S4204), the history setting process during the opening/closing execution mode (Step S4205), and the history setting process during the high frequency support mode (Step S4206) are not executed. Since the game area PA is formed by the space partitioned in the front and rear by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, Even if the game area PA is opened forward and a game ball is shot toward the game area PA in this situation, the game ball cannot flow down the game area PA normally. In addition, when a game ball enters the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 while the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the game hall administrator may This is the case where the front door frame 14 is in an open state and a game ball enters due to maintenance or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a regular game execution situation, there is no need to manage such a game ball entry. Therefore, in the history setting process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S4204 to S4206 are executed.

When none of the door open flag, open/close execution mode flag, and high frequency support flag of the sound/light RAM 165 is set to "1", that is, when the front door frame 14 is closed and the open/close execution mode and high frequency support flags are not set. If none of the frequency support modes are set (steps S4201 to S4203: NO), normal history setting processing is executed (step S4204). In normal history setting processing, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to the HI level, 1 is added to the value of the first counter 211a for normal use, When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to HI level, 1 is added to the value of the second counter 211b for normal use, and the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is counted. When it is confirmed that the signal has switched to HI level, 1 is added to the value of the third counter 211c for normal use, and it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to HI level. 1 is added to the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use, and when it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has switched to HI level, the value of the fifth counter 211e for normal use is When it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to HI level, the value of the normal sixth counter 211f is incremented by 1, and When it is confirmed that the input seventh signal has switched to HI level, 1 is added to the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use.

When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the opening/closing execution mode is set (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), the history setting process during the opening/closing execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process during the opening/closing execution mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to HI level, the value of the first counter 212a for the opening/closing execution mode is set. is added by 1 to the value of the second counter 212b for the opening/closing execution mode when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, and 1 is added to the value of the third counter 212c for the open/close execution mode, and the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is changed to the HI level. When it is confirmed that it has been switched to HI level, 1 is added to the value of the fourth counter 212d for the open/close execution mode, and it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has been switched to HI level. 1 is added to the value of the fifth counter 212e for the opening/closing execution mode. 1 is added to the value of the 6 counter 212f, and 1 is added to the value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening/closing execution mode when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to the HI level. .

If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and the high-frequency support mode is set (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), a history setting process for the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In the history setting process during the high-frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has switched to HI level, the first counter 213a for the high-frequency support mode , and when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 213b for the high-frequency support mode is incremented by 1; When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the 3 buffer 202c has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 and input to the fourth buffer 202d. When it is confirmed that the fourth signal has switched to HI level, 1 is added to the value of the fourth counter 213d for high frequency support mode, and the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e switches to HI level. 1 is added to the value of the fifth counter 213e for the high-frequency support mode, and when it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has switched to HI level. 1 is added to the value of the sixth counter 213f for high-frequency support mode, and when it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has switched to HI level, the seventh counter for high-frequency support mode One is added to the value of the counter 213g.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing check processing executed in step S4120 of the effect control processing (FIG. 74) in the sound and light side CPU 163. FIG.

If it is not the check result display period (step S4301: NO), on condition that a check start command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S4302: YES), the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 is executed. The check start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound and light CPU 163 when an instruction signal to start checking is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63 . However, it is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a check start command is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 sec) has passed since the demonstration display was started. A check start command may be transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 when a predetermined operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, and when the predetermined time comes, the main side A check start command may be transmitted from the CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163, and the sound and light side CPU 163 starts checking from the main side CPU 63 every time a predetermined period (for example, 120 minutes) elapses from the time when the previous check start command is transmitted. A configuration in which a command is transmitted may be used. Further, the trigger for executing the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which a command is received from the main side CPU 63, and the event triggering the transmission of the check start command as described above The sound and light side CPU 163 may grasp whether or not an event has occurred, and the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 may be executed when the sound and light side CPU 163 grasps that the event has occurred.

In the processing of steps S4303 to S4308, normal arithmetic processing is first executed (step S4303). In normal arithmetic processing, by referring to the contents of the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g of the sound and light side ROM 164, the same ball entry portion of the first to seventh counters 211a to 211g for normal use The values of the counters corresponding to 24a, 31-34 are totaled. Specifically, since the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c store information indicating that it is the general prize winning opening 31 as already described, these first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c The total value K2 is calculated by summing the values of the first to third normal counters 211a to 211c corresponding to 204c. On the other hand, the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 204d to 204g store information corresponding to separate ball-entering portions 24a and 32 to 34, respectively. In this case, the values of the fourth to seventh counters 211d to 211g for normal use are grasped as values of different ball entering portions 24a and 32 to 34, respectively. Specifically, the value of the seventh counter 211g for normal use is K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 211d for normal use is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and the fifth counter for normal use The value of 211e is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 211f for normal use is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port . Then, parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters during normal operation. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated parameters are within the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0.6. 7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the seventh When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the judgment processing that the calculated various parameters are in the third range is applied to the various parameters at normal time. run against. Then, information on the determination result is written in the main RAM 65 .

After that, arithmetic processing for the open/close execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the arithmetic processing for the opening/closing execution mode, similarly to the ordinary arithmetic processing (step S4303), the values of the first to third counters 212a to 212c for the opening/closing execution mode are summed to calculate the total value K2. . Further, the value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, and the value of the opening/closing execution mode is set to K3. The value of the fifth counter 212e is set to K4 corresponding to the first opening 33, and the value of the sixth counter 212f for the opening/closing execution mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second opening . Then, parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the opening/closing execution mode. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated parameters are within the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0.6. 7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the seventh When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the various calculated parameters are determined to be in the third range. Run on parameters. Then, information on the determination result is written in the main RAM 65 .

After that, arithmetic processing for the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the calculation process for the high-frequency support mode, similarly to the calculation process for normal use (step S4303), the values of the first to third counters 213a to 213c for the high-frequency support mode are totaled to obtain the total value K2. calculate. Further, the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high frequency support mode is K1 corresponding to the outlet 24a, the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high frequency support mode is K3 corresponding to the special electric winning device 32, and the high frequency support The value of the fifth mode counter 213e is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high frequency support mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port . Then, parameters 7 and 8 are calculated in the same manner as in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. After that, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the high frequency support mode. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, it is assumed that the calculated parameters are within the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0.6. 7 or the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the calculated various parameters are considered to be in the second range, and the seventh When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the judgment processing that the calculated various parameters are in the third range is performed in the high-frequency support mode. Execute for various parameters. Then, information on the determination result is written in the main RAM 65 .

After that, display start processing of the calculation result is executed (step S4306). In the display start process, a judgment result command corresponding to the information of each judgment result derived in each calculation process of steps S4303 to S4305 is transmitted to the display control device . When the display control device 82 receives the determination result command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display all the information of each determination result derived in each arithmetic processing of steps S4303 to S4305. As a result, an image showing which of the first range, the second range, and the third range the various parameters correspond to in the normal state, and an image showing which of the first range, the second range, and the third range the various parameters in the open/close execution mode correspond to the first range, the second range, and the third range. An image showing which of the three ranges corresponds and an image showing which of the first, second, and third ranges the various parameters in the high-frequency support mode correspond to are displayed as patterns. Displayed on device 41 . In this case, the images corresponding to the information of these determination results correspond to various parameters in the normal state, various parameters in the open/close execution mode, and various parameters in the high-frequency support mode. Each of these images is displayed in a manner that allows the manager of the gaming hall to recognize whether the game is being played.

After that, information corresponding to the display period of the check result (specifically, 30 seconds) is set in the display counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 (step S4307). The value set in the display counter is decremented periodically (for example, every 4 msec). In addition, "1" is set to the in-display flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 165 (step S4308). The on-display flag is a flag for the sound and light side CPU 163 to specify that it is the check result display period.

If "1" is set in the on-display flag of the sound and light side RAM 165, an affirmative determination is made in step S4301. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the on-display counter of the sound and light side RAM 165 (step S4309). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the on-display counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S4310). If the value of the counter being displayed is "0" (step S4310: YES), the calculation result display termination process is executed (step S4311). In the display end processing, a display end command is transmitted to the display control device 82 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result on the pattern display device 41 is ended. Upon receiving the display end command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so as to end the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result.

After that, the on-display flag of the sound and light side RAM 165 is cleared to "0" (step S4312). Further, when the process of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and the counters 213a of the high frequency support mode counter area 213 Clear the value of ~213g to "0". As a result, the ball entry histories of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are initialized, and management of the ball entry histories is newly started. However, it is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g of the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g of the open/close execution mode counter area 212, and the high frequency support The values of the counters 213a to 213g in the mode counter area 213 may be maintained as they are. In this case, the ball-entering histories of the ball-entering units 24a, 31 to 34 are accumulated over a plurality of execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the ball-entering history. Further, in this configuration, the ball entry history of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 is generated based on the reception of the history deletion signal from the hall computer HC and the generation of the deletion operation using the operation section provided in the pachinko machine 10. may be deleted.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the accumulation of ball entry histories of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34, calculation using the ball entry histories, and notification of the calculation results are performed by the sound and light side instead of the main side CPU 63. It is executed by the CPU 163 . As a result, while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the main CPU 63 that supervises the progress of the game, accumulation of ball entry histories of the ball entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and computation using the relevant ball entry histories are performed. , and the notification of the calculation result thereof.

The ball entry results of the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 are transmitted from the main side CPU 63 using a dedicated signal path provided separately from the signal path for transmitting commands from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163. It is transmitted to the optical side CPU 163 . This makes it possible to transmit the ball entry results of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 without increasing the number of commands.

Information indicating which ball entry result of the ball entry portion 24a, 31 to 34 corresponds to the signal path through which the ball entry result of the ball entry portion 24a, 31 to 34 is transmitted, and information corresponding to each signal path Information on the number of game balls awarded is stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 164 . As a result, processing for grasping which ball entry result of the ball entry section 24a, 31 to 34 corresponds to each signal path, and information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each signal path. There is no need to transmit from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 .

It should be noted that the configuration is limited to that the ball entry results of the ball entry sections 24a, 31 to 34 are transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path different from the command signal path. Instead, for example, it may be configured to transmit from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163 using a command signal path. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a command corresponding to the type of each ball entering portion 24a, 31 to 34 is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the sound and light side CPU 163. FIG. In this configuration, each command may include information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each of the entering ball sections 24a, 31 to 34, and the information on the number of prize balls corresponding to each command is stored in the sound and light side ROM 164. may be stored in advance.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the calculation results of various parameters using the history of entering balls into each of the entering balls 24a, 31 to 34 are reported using the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a. However, in this embodiment, the display section for executing this notification is different. The configuration that is different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

In this embodiment, notification display devices 215 to 217 are provided on the main control board 61 of the main control device 60 . First, the main controller 60 will be explained. 78 is a front view of main controller 60, and FIG. 79 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the main controller 60 has a main control board 61 housed in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on an element mounting surface 61a, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61, as shown in FIG. The board box 60a is formed transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. Although the board box 60a is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the board box 60a can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 60a. The main control device 60 is mounted on the rear surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a such that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the pachinko machine 10 rearward. Therefore, by opening the game machine main body 12 to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a and It is possible to see the MPU 62 through the opposing wall portion 60b.

The board box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c and 60d back and forth. As shown in FIG. 78, these case bodies 60c and 60d are separated. A connecting portion 60e is provided for blocking and for leaving a trace when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated. A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 60a. As a result, even if the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated by destroying the part of the joint part 60e in a state where the separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d is prevented by using the part of the joint part 60e, Further, by bringing another coupling portion 60e into a coupled state, it becomes possible to prevent the separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d again. Also, since the connecting portion 60e is destroyed and a trace remains when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, it is possible to visually check the connecting portion 60e to determine whether the case bodies 60c and 60d have been illegally separated. It is possible to comprehend. A sealing seal 60f is attached to a side of the substrate box 60a opposite to the side on which the coupling portion 60e is arranged, so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c and 60d. When the sealing seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case bodies 60c and 60d. As a result, when the sealing seal 60f is peeled off when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated, it is possible to leave a trace.

In the main controller 60 configured as described above, the main control board 61 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 215 to 217 as shown in FIG. Specifically, a first notification display device 215, a second notification display device 216, and a third notification display device 217 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third information display devices 215 to 217 is installed so that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces. As a result, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 accommodated in the board box 60a can be viewed from the outside of the board box 60a. As already explained, the main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 in the board box 60a so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, when the game machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third The notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually observed.

In the first notification display device 215, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) during normal times specified in the tallying process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the first notification display device 215, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the first notification display device 215; Characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the first notification display device 215 .

In the second notification display device 216, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the second notification display device 216, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the second notification display device 216, and when the determination result of the various parameters is in the third range, Characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the second notification display device 216 .

In the third notification display device 217, various parameters (the seventh parameter and the 8 parameters) is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range are displayed on the third notification display device 217, and the determination result of the various parameters is displayed. is in the second range, the characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the third notification display device 217; A character, symbol, number, or color corresponding to the third range is displayed on the third notification display device 217 .

By the way, the display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is the same as the display of each determination result in the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a in the thirteenth embodiment. It starts when the result display period comes and ends when the check result display period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 may be configured to always display the immediately preceding determination results. Further, when the sensor for detecting the opening of the gaming machine body 12 detects that the gaming machine body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 display the previous The display of each judgment result is started, and when the sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine body 12 detects that the game machine body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the first to third The display of each determination result on the notification display devices 215 to 217 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 .

A shielding sheet 60g is provided in a facing region facing the first to third information display devices 215 to 217 in the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a. The blocking sheet 60g is provided to make the inside of the board box 60a, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 invisible through the area in which the blocking sheet 60g is provided in the board box 60a. ing. Specifically, although a hologram sheet is provided as the shielding sheet 60g, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a reflective sheet or a diffusely reflective sheet is provided may be employed. By providing the shielding sheet 60g, even if the area in which the shielding sheet 60g is provided in the board box 60a is viewed from the front, the presence of the shielding sheet 60g prevents the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 from being displayed. It becomes impossible to see. As a result, when the game machine main body 12 is opened in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like while a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, the first to third This reduces the possibility that the notification display devices 215 to 217 will be seen.

On the other hand, since the blocking sheet 60g is provided in a partial area of the opposing wall portion 60b, by obliquely viewing the opposing wall portion 60b toward the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217, The display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be viewed from the outside of the board box 60a. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can visually check the notification contents of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 from the outside of the board box 60a.

Incidentally, the blocking sheet 60g is not provided in the area facing the MPU 62 on the facing wall portion 60b. As a result, even if the blocking sheet 60g is provided, the visibility of the MPU 62 can be prevented from deteriorating.

It should be noted that a configuration in which a member for reducing the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 may be provided instead of the blocking sheet 60g. For example, a colored transparent sheet with low transparency may be provided in place of the shielding sheet 60g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, although the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually recognized, the display contents on the display surfaces are difficult to see.

<Seventeenth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, an example in which the pachinko machine 10 is configured to manage the game history is shown. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described. 80 is a front view of the slot machine 310, FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the slot machine 310 with the front door 312 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the slot machine 310 has a housing 311 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 311 so that the housing 311 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 312 is attached to the front side of the housing 311 as shown in FIGS. The front door 312 is supported by the housing 311 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 311 with a shaft portion 312a provided on the left side of the front door 312 as a rotation axis. The front door 312 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 312b provided on the rear surface thereof.

A game panel 314 is provided near the upper center of the front door 312 as shown in FIG. The game panel 314 has three vertically long display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R arranged side by side. The display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 310 is visible through the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the inside of the housing 311 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 311a, and a reel unit 316 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 311a. The reel unit 316 includes a left reel 316L, a middle reel 316M, and a right reel 316R, each of which is formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 316L, 316M, 316R. The rotation axes of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 316L, 316M, 316R correspond to the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R one-to-one. there is Accordingly, part of the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are visible through the corresponding display windows 315L, 315M, 315R. Further, when the reels 316L, 316M, 316R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are projected through the respective display windows 315L, 315M, 315R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

On the lower left side of the game panel 314, as shown in FIG. 80, a start lever 321 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R. When the start lever 321 is operated while game media such as medals are bet, the reels 316L, 316M and 316R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 321, stop buttons 322, 323, 324 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 316L, 316M, 316R. The respective stop buttons 322, 323, 324 are arranged directly below the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R corresponding to the reels 316L, 316M, 316R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 322, 323, 324 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 316L started rotating.

The reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are started to rotate based on the operation of the start lever 321, and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 322, 323, and 324. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal insertion slot 325 for inserting medals as investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. As shown in FIG. 81, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 are guided to the hopper device 318 by the selector 317 provided on the back of the front door 312 if reception is permitted, or to the hopper device 318 if reception is prohibited. The medals are led to the medal receiving tray 312d from the medal discharge port 312c provided in the front lower portion of the front door 312 (see FIG. 80). The hopper device 318 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 312d through the medal ejection port 312c when a winning corresponding to the provision of game media is established on the activated line. there is

Below the medal slot 325, as shown in FIG. 80, a return button 326 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 325 are jammed in the selector 317. FIG. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R, there is a first credit insertion button 327 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and two virtual medals are inserted at once. and a third credit insertion button 329 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 331 is provided on the left side of the start lever 321 . That is, the slot machine 310 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 331 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 312c as real medals.

A power supply device 319 is provided inside the housing 311 as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 . The power supply device 319 includes a power switch 319a operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 319b for resetting various states of the slot machine 310, and a setting state of the slot machine 310 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 319c is provided to be operated to change within the range of setting 6”.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 316L, 316M, 316R will be described.

FIG. 83 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 316L, middle reel 316M and right reel 316R. As shown in the figure, each reel 316L, 316M, 316R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers "0" to "19" are assigned to the respective reels 316L, 316M, 316R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol that is , and is not actually attached to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 316L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 316L), a “cherry” symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 316L), and “ Replay" symbol (e.g., 16th on the left reel 316L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 15th on the left reel 316L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., 13th on the left reel 316L), "Red 7" symbol ( For example, there are eight types of symbols, such as the 12th symbol on the left reel 316L) and the "White 7" symbol (eg, the 10th symbol on the left reel 316L). Then, as shown in FIG. 83, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

FIG. 84 is a front view of the display windows 315L, 315M and 315R. Each of the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 316L, 316M, 316R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R.

In this slot machine 310, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 316L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 316M and the middle symbols of the right reel 316R. Spinning of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is started with a prescribed number of medals bet, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of payout of medals and replaying are achieved. Either the profit and the transition of the game state are given.

That is, in this slot machine 310, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SUL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 316L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 316M and the lower pattern of the right reel 316R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 316L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 316M and the upper pattern of the right reel 316R. The connected sub-line SUL2, the lower pattern of the left reel 316L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 316M and the lower pattern of the right reel 316R are connected to the sub-line SUL3, the lower pattern of the left reel 316L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 316M and the right reel 316R. Winning is not achieved even if a combination of symbols to be a winning target is established on a straight line such as a subline SUL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 85, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

The minor winnings for which medals are paid out include the first compensation winning, the second compensation winning, the third compensation winning, the bell winning, the first watermelon winning, the second watermelon winning and the cherry winning. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is either a "BAR" symbol or a "WHITE 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "bell" symbol, and the right reel 316R has a "bell" symbol. If the stop symbol is a "bell" symbol, the first compensation winning prize is awarded. Also, on the main line ML, the left reel 316L has a stopped symbol of either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol, the middle reel 316M has a "bell" symbol, and the right reel 316R has a stopped symbol. If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second compensation winning prize. Further, on the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol, 3rd Compensation Award. If any one of the first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “1”.

When the stopped symbol of the left reel 316L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 316R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the bell wins. becomes. When the bell wins, the number of game media to be given becomes “9”.

On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first Watermelon wins prize. When the first watermelon wins, the number of game media to be given becomes “7”.

On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "BAR" symbol. Watermelon wins prize. When the second watermelon wins, the number of game media to be given becomes “7”.

When the stopped symbol of the left reel 316L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 316M or the right reel 316R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give the privilege of replaying the next game without betting medals (or virtual medals) include normal replay winnings, 1st replay winnings, 2nd RT replay winnings, and first fall replays. There is a prize and a second fall replay prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol. In that case, it will usually be a replay prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first RT. Replay prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol of the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol of the middle reel 316M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol of the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol, the second RT Replay prize. On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is the "replay" symbol. It will be a fall replay prize. On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is the "watermelon" symbol. It will be a fall replay prize.

If any of the above replay wins, it is possible to play the next game without betting on both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, in a game in which three medals are bet, if any of the replay wins, it is possible to start the next game with three bets while eliminating the need to bet both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible.

In addition, among the above various replay prizes, the 1st replay prize, the 2nd RT replay prize, the 1st fall replay prize, and the 2nd fall replay prize not only trigger the granting of replay prizes, but also trigger the transition of the game state. Become. In this slot machine 310, a plurality of types of game states are set so that the types of the winning combinations to be selected in the winning lottery process and the winning probability of each winning combination are different. Occurs when the replay winning as a trigger is established.

There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is the "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is the "red 7" symbol. If it is a pattern, it becomes the first BB prize. On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 316L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 316M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 316R is a "white 7" symbol. , 2nd BB winner. When the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the BB state.

The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit number of games is higher than in a normal mode and non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state), which will be described later. Furthermore, the BB state is a game state in which the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit game number is higher than in any game state other than the BB state. Specifically, a winning combination that enables establishment of a bell prize is won at a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.1) than in other gaming states, and each reel 316L when the winning combination is won. , 316M and 316R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R. The BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when an end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of game execution. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 310, the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or greater than the termination reference number (for example, "350") as the termination condition. there is

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 312, as shown in FIG. 80, an upper lamp 332, a speaker 333, and an image display device 334 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the light emission of the upper lamp 332 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and the light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is performed. The speakers 333 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 333 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 334 is performed.

The image display device 334 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 334 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game.

On the game panel 314 of the front door 312, below the display windows 315L, 315M, 315R, there is a credit display section 335 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 335 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be given when a small winning combination is won. A given number display section 336 for displaying the number of game media is provided. These display units 335 and 336 are composed of 7-segment displays, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

The slot machine 310 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a main controller 340 is provided above the reel unit 316 . The main controller 340 is attached to a back plate 311 b that forms the back of the housing 311 . The main controller 340 is constructed by housing a main control board 341 in a board box 345 .

An MPU 342 is mounted on the element mounting surface which is one plate surface of the main control board 341 . The board box 345 is formed transparent so that the MPU 342 accommodated in the board box 345 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 345 . Although the board box 345 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 342 accommodated in the board box 345 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 345. The main controller 340 is mounted on the rear surface of the back plate 311b of the housing 311 in the board box 345 so that the facing wall portion 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310. FIG. Therefore, by opening the front door 312 toward the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall 345a of the board box 345 and It is possible to see the MPU 342 through the opposing wall portion 345a.

The substrate box 345 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent separation of the case bodies and to leave traces when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 345b is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 345b are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 345 . As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the coupling portion 345b in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using the part of the coupling portion 345b, another coupling portion 345b can be used after that. are connected, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting portion 345b is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting portion 345b. Become. A sealing seal 345c is attached to a side of the substrate box 345 other than the side on which the connecting portions 345b are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 345c is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 345c is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace of it.

In the main controller 340 configured as described above, the main control board 341 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 346 to 348 . Specifically, a first notification display device 346, a second notification display device 347, and a third notification display device 348 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is a segment display device in which seven LED display segments are arranged. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third information display devices 346 to 348 is installed so that its display surface faces the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces. As a result, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 housed inside the board box 345 can be viewed from the outside of the board box 345 . Further, as already explained, the main controller 340 is mounted on the back plate 311b of the housing 311 in the board box 345 so that the facing wall portion 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310. Therefore, when the front door 312 is opened to the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311 to the front of the slot machine 310, the first to the second 3, it becomes possible to see the display devices 346 to 348 for notification. These first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are used to notify the management result of the game history. This will be explained in detail later.

Visual confirmation of the main controller 340 is performed by opening the front door 312 with respect to the housing 311 to the front of the slot machine 310 . The housing 311 is provided with lighting devices 349a and 349b in order to improve the visibility of the main control device 340 when the front door 312 is opened. The illumination devices 349a and 349b are provided on the rear surface of the left side plate 311c and the rear surface of the right side plate 311d of the housing 311 so as to form a left and right pair. The lighting devices 349a and 349b are equipped with high-intensity LEDs as light emitters, and are installed so that the light irradiation direction is the main controller 340. FIG. The irradiation range IR of the light by the illumination devices 349a and 349b includes the range facing the MPU 342 on the facing wall portion 345a of the main controller 340. FIG. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 342 . Also, the irradiation range IR includes the range facing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 on the facing wall portion 345a of the main controller 340. FIG. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 . Further, the irradiation range IR includes the range where the coupling portion 345b is provided and the range where the sealing seal 345c is provided in the substrate box 345 of the main controller 340. FIG. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the joint portion 345b and the sealing seal 345c.

Light irradiation from the lighting devices 349a and 349b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 312 with respect to the housing 311, although details will be described later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 312, an opening angle sensor 312e is provided on the rear surface of the front door 312 and adjacent to the shaft portion 312a, as shown in FIG. The open angle sensor 312e can detect whether or not the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311, and when the front door 312 is open, the opening angle of the front door 312e is a predetermined opening angle. It is possible to detect whether or not the Although the method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 312 by the opening angle sensor 312e is arbitrary, for example, when the front door 312 is in the closed state, it is pressed, and when the front door 312 is in the open state, A detection part that releases the pressed state, and a detection part that enters the pressed state when the open angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined open angle and does not enter the pressed state until the open angle of the front door 312 reaches the predetermined open angle. can be considered.

The slot machine 310 is provided with an effect control device 350 as shown in FIG. 81 in addition to the main control device 340 . The effect control device 350 is arranged behind the image display device 334 on the front door 312 . The effect control device 350 controls the upper lamp 332 , the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 based on commands received from the main control device 340 . Incidentally, the effect control device 350, like the main control device 340, has a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of this slot machine 310 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The main controller 340 has a main control board 341 that controls the main game. An MPU 342 is mounted on the main control board 341 . The MPU 342 includes a ROM 343 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 342, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 343. A RAM 344, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 343 and the RAM 344 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 342, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 342, the reel unit 316, a start detection sensor 321a that detects the operation of the start lever 321, stop detection sensors 322a, 323a, and 324a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 322, 323, and 324, medal insertion Inserted medal detection sensor 325a for detecting medals inserted from mouth 325; credit insertion detection sensors 327a, 328a, 329a for individually detecting operation of credit insertion buttons 327, 328, 329; Settlement detection sensor 331a, payout detection sensor of hopper device 318, sensor for detecting operation of reset button 319b provided in power supply 319, setting key inserted into setting key insertion hole 319c provided in power supply 319 and an opening angle sensor 312e for detecting the opening angle of the front door 312 are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 342.

On the output side of the MPU 342, the reel unit 316, the selector drive unit 317a provided in the selector 317, the payout motor of the hopper device 318, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, the lighting devices 349a and 349b, and A production control device 350 and the like are connected. In each game, the MPU 342 controls the rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R of the reel unit 316. FIG. As already explained, the selector 317 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 325 to the hopper device 318 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 325a if reception is permitted, and guides them to the hopper device 318 if reception is prohibited. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the detection sensor 325a. The selector drive unit 317a has a function of switching the state of the selector 317 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 342 switches the state of the selector 317 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 317a.

Further, the MPU 342 executes drive control of the hopper device 318 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. In addition, the MPU 342 causes the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 to start display for notifying the management result of the game history when the supply of operating power to the MPU 342 is started, and The display contents are updated each time the management result is updated. In addition, the MPU 342 controls light emission of the lighting devices 349a and 349b according to the open angle of the front door 312. FIG. In addition, the MPU 342 transmits a command to the effect control device 350 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 350 for notifying the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R in the image display device 334. .

An input side of the MPU 342 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 319 (not shown). The power supply device 319 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 310, including the main controller 340, and a power failure monitoring circuit. A power failure signal is output to the MPU 342 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 342 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and enables recovery to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 319 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure for supplying backup power to the RAM 344 as power during power failure when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, data is stored and held in the RAM 344 when backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done. However, the data stored in the RAM 344 is initialized by turning ON the power of the slot machine 310 while pressing the reset button 319b provided on the power supply device 319 .

The performance control device 350 includes a performance control board 351 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 352 is mounted on the performance control board 351 . The MPU 352 includes a ROM 353 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 352, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 353. A RAM 354 is built in, as well as a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 353 and the RAM 354 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 352, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 354 may be configured so that backup power is supplied to the RAM 354 even though the backup power is not supplied from the power failure power supply unit of the power supply unit in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. good.

The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port. The MPU 342 of the main controller 340 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352 as already described, and various commands are received from the MPU 342 . An upper lamp 332 , a speaker 333 and an image display device 334 are connected to the output side of the MPU 352 . Based on commands received from the MPU 342 of the main control device 340, the MPU 352 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333, and display control of the image display device 334, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 342, ROM 343 and RAM 344 of the main control device 340 are referred to as the main MPU 342, the main ROM 343 and the main RAM 344 respectively, and the MPU 352, ROM 353 and RAM 354 of the effect control device 350 are respectively the effect side. They are referred to as MPU 352 , effect side ROM 353 and effect side RAM 354 .

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 342. FIG.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first executed (step S4401). In the initialization processing, interrupts due to timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 342 . After the initialization process is finished, the display start process is executed (step S4402). In the display start processing, the display on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is started. In this case, if the main side RAM 344 stores the information of the management result of the game history just before the last power failure, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 346 are arranged so that the display corresponding to the information is performed. 348 display control. On the other hand, if the main-side RAM 344 does not store the information of the management result of the game history immediately before the last power outage or if the regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting ) is performed, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and the power is turned on (step S4403). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), if the reset button 319b is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: NO), the winning probability remains unchanged. Setting processing is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 319b is turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: YES), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406) after executing the clear process (step S4405).

In the clear processing, all areas in the main RAM 344 are initialized. In this case, the master side RAM 344 stores an area for storing the setting values of the slot machine 310, an area for storing data indicating whether or not it is in the BB state, and data indicating the total number of given game media in the BB state. area, an area storing data indicating whether or not it is in the AT state, an area storing data for specifying conditions for ending the AT state, data indicating the type of lottery mode described later, management results of game history Each area of the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0", including the area where the information is stored, the total game number counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b. As a result, when the clear process is executed, the normal game state is entered regardless of the state before the power cutoff, and the state before the power cutoff is a state in which the progress of the game is regulated with the occurrence of an abnormality as a trigger. If there is, the abnormal state is cancelled.

In the winning probability setting process, the current set value is read under the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current set value is displayed on the credit display section 335 provided on the game panel 314 . When the main RAM 344 is cleared (step S4405), a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display unit 335 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S4405) is performed. is not executed, a display corresponding to the setting value in the state before the power shutdown is performed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 319b is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 335. FIG. Note that if the reset button 319b is operated in a situation where the setting value is "setting 6", the setting value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 321 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the setting value in the credit display section 335 is ended. After executing the winning probability setting process, the process shifts to the normal process (step S4407). The normal processing will be explained later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main processing (step S4403: NO), the power restoration processing from step S4408 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 310 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 310 are normal by checking the main RAM 344 (step S4408). Specifically, if the setting value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S4409). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 344, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 342 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 344 is examined to confirm whether the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S4408 to S4410, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 344 to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 342 and restoring the data saved in the main side RAM 344 to the register of the main side MPU 342, the register of the main side MPU 342 The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S4411). Also, the power failure flag of the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4412). Thereafter, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 352 (step S4413), it returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S4414).

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is prohibited (step S4415), and all the output ports of the main MPU 342 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S4416), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S4417). Then it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a clear process (step S4405).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 msec.

In the register saving process (step S4501), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 342 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 344. FIG. In step S4502, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process advances to step S4503 to execute power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 319 is input to the main MPU 342 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 342 is saved in the main RAM 344 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 342 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 344 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 344, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S4502, various processes after step S4504 are performed. In step S4504, clear processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S4505, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable setting of the next timer interrupt to the main MPU 342 itself. In step S4506, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided to the reels 316L, 316M, 316R in order to rotate the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. In step S4507, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal.

In step S4508, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S4509, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S4510, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 352 is performed. In step S4511, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port is performed. In step S4512, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 344 in the previous step S4501 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 342, respectively. In step S4513, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the display corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed. In step S4514, illumination processing for controlling light emission of the illumination devices 349a and 349b in accordance with the opening angle of the front door 312 is executed. After that, in step S4515, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends. Details of the management processing in step S4513 and the lighting processing in step S4514 will be described later.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU 342. FIG.

In normal processing, start waiting processing is first executed (step S4601). In the start waiting process, when any replay prize has been won in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is performed so that the same number of game media as the number of bets in the previous game have been betted. In addition, in the start waiting process, when medals are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a, if the current bet number is not equal to or greater than the maximum prescribed number of "3", the bet number is incremented by 1, and the bet number is is greater than or equal to the maximum prescribed number of "3", the value of the credit counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is incremented by one. The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of stored virtual medals in the main side MPU 342 .

In the start waiting process, when the automatic insertion process is not executed and any of the credit insertion buttons 327 to 329 is operated, the credit for setting the bet amount corresponding to the operation Executes corresponding processing of input. In the credit insertion handling process, when the first credit insertion button 327 is operated, the maximum amount of gaming media that can be betted at that time is placed in a bet state. When the 3-credit input button 329 is operated, the corresponding bet state is set. In this case, when virtual medals are used for the bet, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals bet is subtracted from the credit counter. In addition, when the number of virtual medals required for setting the bet number corresponding to the operated credit input buttons 327 to 329 is not stored and stored, betting is possible in relation to the stored and stored virtual medals. A maximum amount of game media has been bet.

In the start waiting process, when the number of bets is equal to or more than the maximum specified number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or more than the upper limit accumulated number (specifically, "50"), acceptance prohibition processing is executed. In the acceptance prohibition process, the selector 317 is set in the acceptance prohibition state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 325, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. On the other hand, when the number of bets is less than the maximum specified number or when the value of the credit counter is less than the maximum stored number, acceptance permission processing is executed. In the reception permission process, the selector 317 is set to the reception permission state by starting to output the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. As a result, the medals inserted from the medal slot 325 are collected by the hopper device 318 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. In the start waiting process, when the settlement button 331 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, medals corresponding to the total number of bets and credit counter values are delivered through the medal discharge port 312c. The hopper device 318 is driven and controlled so that the medals are discharged to the medal receiving tray 312d. As a result, the internally stored game media are paid out to the player as actual medals.

After execution of the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number ("3" in this embodiment) (step S4602). Return to the waiting process (step S4601). If the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 321 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 321 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S4601). On the other hand, if the start lever 321 has been operated, after activating the main line ML, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S4604). As a result, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 325, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. After that, a lottery process for performing a lottery for a winning combination in the current game is executed (step S4605), and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process (step S4605). reel control processing is executed (step S4606).

Thereafter, medal payout processing is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with the number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, the value corresponding to the small win this time is added to the credit counter, and if the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded. The hopper device is driven and controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the number of medals is paid out to the medal receiving tray 312d.

After that, a process for dealing with the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state corresponding to the result of the current game (step S4608). Then, reception permission processing is executed (step S4609). As a result, the medals inserted from the medal slot 325 are collected by the hopper device after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a.

The lottery process executed in step S4605 of the normal process (FIG. 83) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained (step S4701). In this slot machine 310, when the start lever 321 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 321, the main MPU 342 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 344. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly acquire the random number at the timing when the start lever 321 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 310 latches the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 321 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 343 (step S4702). Here, in the slot machine 310, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance. , it is possible to set which winning probability the lottery process is to be executed based on. It should be noted that "setting n+1" is more advantageous winning probability for the player than "setting n". In addition, there are three types of lottery modes, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode, which have different lottery tables in the main MPU 342 even if the set values are at the same stage. In addition, as a game state, there is a BB state apart from the state of each lottery mode. In step S4702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

A lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described, taking the case of "Setting 3" as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 92 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 91, index values IV are set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and set with a point value PV. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the free run counter.

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with the bell winning data and the first complementary winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. A bell winning prize is surely generated regardless of the type of reel and the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, and in other cases, the first compensation winning prize is surely generated.

In this slot machine 310, the reels 316L, 316M and 316R are controlled so that the reels 316L, 316M and 316R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. In other words, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are controlled to be stopped within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 316L, 316M, and 316R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If there are five or more symbols between constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 322 to 324, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML. say). The first supplementary prize to the third supplemental prize, the bell prize, and various replay prizes are prize modes in which nothing is lost when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped in the corresponding order. Watermelon winning, cherry winning, 1BB winning, and 2BB winning are prize modes that may be missed depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

As shown in FIG. 91, the index value IV=2 is set with bell winning data and second complementary winning data. When winning with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the types of reels to be stopped and the reels to be stopped and each of the stop buttons 322 to 324 Winning of the bell is surely realized regardless of the operation timing of , and in other cases, winning of the second supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 91, the index value IV=3 is set with bell winning data and third complementary winning data. When winning with index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the types of reels to be stopped and the reels to be stopped and respective stop buttons 322 to 324 Winning of the bell is surely established regardless of the operation timing of , and in other cases, winning of the third supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the first watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV=4. If a win is made with index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 92, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 91, only the second watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV=5. If a win is made with the index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 92, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 91, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV=6. If a win is made with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 92, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 322 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 316L, there is a possibility that the cherry prize will not be established.

As shown in FIG. 91, the index value IV=7 is set with the 1st BB winning data. If a win is made with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 92, the first BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322-324, there is a possibility that the first BB winning will not be established. In addition, as shown in FIG. 91, the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV=8. If a win is made with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 92, the 2nd BB win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 316L, 316M and 316R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322-324, there is a possibility that the 2nd BB prize will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data are erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established, and are retained in the games following the winning game. not passed. On the other hand, the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data establish the corresponding BB winning even in the game following the winning game, except when the main side RAM 344 is cleared. stored until In this case, in a game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is excluded from the lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data are already stored, and a plurality of BB winning data are accumulated. It is possible to avoid being stored by

As shown in FIG. 91, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set to index values IV=9-12. In this case, if the winning is made with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 92, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, and the second stop (reel where the stop command is issued second) is the left reel 316L. , and when the third stop (reel where the last stop command is generated) is the right reel 316R, the 1st replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322 to 324, otherwise Regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322-324, the normal replay winning is surely established. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=10, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The 1st replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322-324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=11, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The 1st replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322-324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=12, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The 1st replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322-324.

When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 91 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the winning when the index value IV=3 The probability of winning is about 1/5.0, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is about 1/131, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is about 1. /187, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is about 1/423, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 The probabilities are respectively about 1/218, the probability of winning when the index value IV=9, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=12 is about 1/28.0 respectively.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as already described, 1RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=9 to 12 in addition to normal replay winning data (see FIG. 91). The probability of winning one of these index values IV=9 to 12 is about 1/7.0. If a win is made with any of the index values IV=9 to 12, the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is established, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode, which is selected in the case of "setting 3" and the first RT mode, will be described. 93 and 94 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, the winning combination data set to index values IV=1 to 8 and the winning probabilities of each index value IV are determined by the normal mode lottery table (see FIG. 93). 91). In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the winning combination data and the respective winning probabilities set to the respective index values IV=1 to 6, which are set to allow the provision of game media. Since they are the same, the types of wins for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those wins are the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode. Also, BB winning data is set to index values IV=7 to 8 in the same manner as in the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as in the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning either BB combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV=9 are different from those in the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=9 to 12 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=9 to 12 is about 1/10.1. When winning with index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 94, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. A second RT replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, and in other cases, a normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=10, the second RT replay winning is achieved when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, otherwise normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=11, the 2nd RT replay wins when the 1st stop is the right reel 316R, the 2nd stop is the left reel 316L, and the 3rd stop is the middle reel 316M. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, otherwise normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=12, the 2nd RT replay wins when the 1st stop is the right reel 316R, the 2nd stop is the middle reel 316M, and the 3rd stop is the left reel 316L. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, otherwise normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. In the 1st RT mode, a win is made with any of the index values IV=9 to 12, and the stop order of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd stops of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R corresponds to the winning combination. If so, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 93, as the winning data of index values IV=13 to 18, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the first falling replay winning data is set. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=13 to 18 is about 1/10.9.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode wins with the index value IV=13, as shown in FIG. 94, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is When the reel is the right reel 316R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, otherwise the first fall replay prize is generated at the operation timing of each stop button 322-324 It definitely happens regardless. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, when the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay prize is awarded. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=15, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=16, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=17, when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=18, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When the normal mode is entered, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the normal mode lottery table.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV=19. The probability of winning with the index value IV=19 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically about 1/6.7. Then, when winning is achieved with this index value IV=19, normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of each of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. .

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, a combination that enables establishment of a replay winning prize is set for index values IV=9 to 19. FIG. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already described, the winning probability of the winning role that enables establishment of a replay prize in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) is about 1. /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/7.0. That is, the first RT mode is a game state with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode, which is selected in the case of "setting 3" and the second RT mode, will be described. 95 and 96 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 95, the winning combination data set to index values IV=1 to 8 and the winning probabilities of each index value IV are determined by the normal mode lottery table (see FIG. 95). 91) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93). In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 are set with the winning combination data and the respective winning probabilities set to the respective index values IV=1 to 6, which are set to allow the provision of game media. Since they are the same, the types of wins for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those wins are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set to index values IV=7 to 8 in the same manner as in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, and the winning probability is set in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. identical to the table. That is, the probability of winning one of the BB roles is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set after the index value IV=9 are different from those in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 95, in addition to the normal replay winning data, second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data with index values IV=9 to 14. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV=9 to 14 is about 1/5.5.

When the lottery table for the second RT mode wins with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 96, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is When it is the right reel 316R, the normal replay prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 322-324, otherwise the second falling replay prize is generated at the operation timing of each stop button 322-324. It definitely happens regardless. Also, when winning with the index value IV=10, if the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay prize is awarded. It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay wins reliably occur regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=11, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R, then the normal replay prize is won. It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay wins reliably occur regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=12, if the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay prize is won. It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay wins reliably occur regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=13, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M, the normal replay prize is awarded. It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay wins reliably occur regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324. Also, when winning with the index value IV=14, if the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L, the normal replay prize is awarded. It certainly occurs regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324, and in other cases, the second fall replay wins reliably occur regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322-324. When the second falling replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV=15. The probability of winning with the index value IV=15 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically about 1/6.3. Then, when winning is achieved with this index value IV=15, the normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R and the stop operation timing of each reel 316L, 316M and 316R. .

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, a combination that enables establishment of a replay prize is set for index values IV=9 to 15. Since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning role (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that enables establishment of a replay prize in the second RT mode is about 1. /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in normal mode is about 1/7.0. That is, the second RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is approximately 1/2.9. That is, the second RT mode has the same replay probability as the first RT mode. However, it is not limited to the configuration in which the replay probability in the first RT mode is the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode. A certain configuration may be used, the second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, and the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

The lottery table for normal mode, the lottery table for 1st RT mode, and the lottery table for 2nd RT mode are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the set value is high. The probability of winning the BB role increases as the number increases, but the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of the setting value. Also, if any BB role is won, the 1st BB role and the 2nd BB role are selected so that the BB role is not won in duplicate, regardless of whether the mode is the normal mode, the 1st RT mode or the 2nd RT mode. The role is excluded from the lottery. In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 343 also stores BB lottery tables that are referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) in the BB state. table is stored. In the lottery table for BB, only three types of bell, the first watermelon and the second watermelon are set as the lottery, and the winning probability of the bell is set to about 1/1.1. , the winning probability of the first watermelon role is set to about 1/100, and the winning probability of the second watermelon role is set to about 1/100. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games is higher than in other game states.

Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 90), after selecting the lottery table (step S4702), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S4703), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning combination is set. (Step S4704). In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. Note that in the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S4701 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV "1" and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value. A new judgment value DV is set.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S4705). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds "65535", a winning data acquisition process is executed for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main side RAM 344 (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the lottery table to be referred to are set in the main RAM 344 . In the state where the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, it is cleared to "0" after the end of the current game regardless of whether or not the winning corresponding to the winning data is established. If it is winning data, it is cleared to "0" when winning is established.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S4705: NO), it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV (step S4707), and it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S4708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S4704 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S4704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S4705, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

If the process of step S4706 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S4708, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In this case, after executing a stop information setting process for setting stop information for reel stop control (step S4709), a game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 352 (step S4710). A game start command is a command for making the effect-side MPU 352 recognize that a new game has started. Information indicating whether or not there is, and information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 90) in the current game are included.

When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 352 grasps the general content of the effect in the current game based on the content of the game start command, and performs the details of the effect in a manner according to the grasped general content of the effect. will be determined by lottery. Then, the data table corresponding to the contents of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 353 to the performance side RAM 354, and according to the read data table, light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333, and display of the image display device 334 are performed. Execute control.

Next, reel control processing executed in step S4606 of the normal processing (FIG. 89) will be described.

In the reel control process, the reels 316L, 316M and 316R are started to rotate in a situation where the reels 316L, 316M and 316R have not started to rotate. In this case, the reels 316L, 316M and 316R are driven and controlled so as to rotate at a constant speed after passing through a predetermined acceleration period. Note that the operation of each stop button 322 to 324 is disabled until constant speed rotation is achieved.

In the reel control process, after the reels 316L, 316M, 316R rotate at a constant speed, the stop buttons 322 to 324 corresponding to the rotating reels 316L, 316M, 316R are operated. The reels 316L, 316M, 316R corresponding to the stop buttons 322-324 are stopped. In this case, information for stop control corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (step S4605) in the current game, and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R targeted for the stop operation at the timing when the stop operation was performed. The number of slides until the symbols are actually stopped is determined based on the symbols existing at a predetermined position (for example, the lower stage). Then, the reels 316L, 316M, 316R are stopped at the timing when the reels 316L, 316M, 316R to be stopped are moved in the rotational direction by the determined number of slips. The sliding number is one of "0", "1", "2", "3" and "4". In addition, the number of slides ensures that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be stopped on the main line ML as much as possible, while the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination not winning the winning is stopped on the main line ML. is set to avoid In addition, with index values IV of IV=1 to 3 and IV=9 and later, the winning combination changes according to the order in which the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped. In this case, information for stop control is changed according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R. Further, in the reel control process, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML when all the reels 316L, 316M and 316R are stopped. When any of the replay winnings has been established, the privilege of replaying is provided, and when any of the winnings corresponding to the awarding of the game medium has been established, the prize corresponding to the winning is established. Make a setting to give a number of game media.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 97, the processing for dealing with the end of the game executed in step S4608 of the normal processing (FIG. 89) will be described.

In the corresponding processing at the end of the game, 1 is added to the value of the total number of games counter 344a (see FIG. 86) provided in the main side RAM 344 (step S4801). The total number-of-games counter 344a is a counter for counting the number of games completed regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, BB state, AT state, or ART state. The AT state means that when the stopping order of the stop buttons 322 to 324 is in a predetermined correct order, the combination of symbols corresponding to the correct order is established on the main line ML, and the correct order is not obtained. It refers to a state in which, in a situation in which an advantageous lottery combination is won, the stop order, which is the correct order, is notified. Such a lottery combination corresponding to the stop order can be won in both the non-AT state and the AT state, but the stop order that is the correct order is not notified in the non-AT state, whereas the stop order that is the correct order is not notified in the AT state. Since the order is notified, the AT state is more advantageous for the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, when the index value IV of the winning combination is won in accordance with the order of stopping the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R with the index value IV=1 to 3 and the index value IV=9 or later, the AT state is performed. If there is, the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing a winning combination that is advantageous to the player is notified, and if the non-AT state, such stopping order is not notified. In addition, when the lottery process (FIG. 90) for a winning combination is executed, the main MPU 342 transmits a game start command corresponding to the result of the lottery to the effect side MPU 352, and the effect side MPU 352 is informed of the stop order based on the game start command. By controlling the display of the image display device 334 by the MPU 352, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are started before the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R can be stopped in the game corresponding to the execution times of the lottery process (FIG. 90) for the winning combination. Also, the ART state is a game state in which the player stays in the first RT mode or the second RT mode in the AT state. In the ART state, the probability of winning a replay prize increases, and the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game increases as described above. Therefore, it is possible to turn the ART state into an advantageous game state.

In the corresponding processing at the end of the game, if any BB winning state or BB state (step S4802: YES), BB processing is executed (step S4803). In the BB processing, if any BB role is won, it is determined whether or not a BB prize corresponding to the winning BB role has occurred in the current game, and a BB prize is generated. If so, by setting the BB state flag provided in the main side RAM 344 to "1", the game state is shifted to the BB state. As a result, the BB lottery table is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 90) in the next and subsequent games. In addition, by transmitting a command indicating the transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 352, the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 are caused to start the effect for the BB state. By erasing the BB winning data from the main side RAM 344 when shifting to the BB state, the state of winning the BB role is released. In addition, the same BB state occurs regardless of whether the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize occurs.

In the BB processing in the BB state, it is determined whether or not game media have been awarded in the current game. Add the number of game media provided in the current game. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total given number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number. If the number is less than the value corresponding to the termination reference number, the BB processing is terminated as it is. If it is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state flag of the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" to end the BB state. In addition, by transmitting a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the production side MPU 352, the ending image is displayed on the image display device 334, and then the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 for the BB state are displayed. end the production of

When the BB state ends, the lottery mode becomes the normal mode regardless of which mode the lottery mode was before the BB state started. Also, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state processing, which will be described later, is executed after the BB state ends regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S4802, or if the process of step S4803 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is in the AT state (step S4804). If it is not in the AT state (step S4804: NO), RT mode transition processing (step S4805) and transition chance management processing (step S4806) are executed. In addition, when a stop operation is first performed on the middle reel 316M or the right reel 316R in a game in a state that is neither the BB state nor the AT state, a notification indicating that the stop operation should be performed from the left reel 316L is performed. However, no penalty is awarded to limit the award of benefits in subsequent games.

In the RT mode transition process (step S4805), if it is specified that the first RT replay winning has occurred in the current game, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and if the second RT replay winning has occurred in the current game When it is specified that the device is in the second RT mode, the mode is shifted to the second RT mode. In addition, in the RT mode transition processing, when it is specified that the second fall replay win has occurred in the current game, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and if the first fall replay win has occurred in the current game. If it is identified that the

In the shift chance management process (step S4806), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not a special combination has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the combination in this game (step S4901). A special win means any of the index values IV=4-6. If the special role is won (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether or not the advantage regulation flag provided in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4902). The advantageous restriction flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 342 that the transition to the AT state (that is, the ART state) is prohibited. Processing when the advantageous restriction flag is set to "1" will be described later.

If the advantage restriction flag is not set to "1" (step S4902: NO), the transfer lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock privilege is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344. The stock benefit can be accumulated when the above special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in the case where the advantageous regulation flag of the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" in the normal game state. It's about perks. Six levels of "0" to "5" are set for the stock privilege, and the stock privilege becomes "0" when there is no accumulated privilege. In the transfer lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege being "0", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 5% probability that the AT transfer will be won, and the index value IV = 5 will be won. If the index value IV=6, AT shift wins with a probability of 10%, and if the index value IV=6 wins, AT shift wins with a probability of 15%. The contents of the transfer lottery table referred to when the stock benefits are "1" to "5" will be described later.

After reading the transfer lottery table in step S4903, AT transfer lottery processing is executed (step S4904). In the AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, at a 1.49 msec cycle) in the main RAM 344 is read, and the read value of the transition lottery counter is applied to the transition lottery table. match.

When the AT transition lottery process to the AT state is won (step S4905: YES), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the content of the stock privilege is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344 (step S4906). In the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege being "0", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 90%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 9%, and 200 games will be selected. 1% chance of being The contents of the initial number-of-games lottery table referred to when the stock privilege is "1" to "5" will be described later.

After reading out the number-of-initial-games lottery table in step S4906, the number-of-initial-games lottery process is executed (step S4907). In the initial game number lottery process, the value of the game number lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344 is read, and the read game number lottery counter value is used as the initial game number. Match against the lottery table. Then, the initial number of games corresponding to the verification result is set in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4908).

After that, it is determined whether or not the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). If it is in the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), there is no need to wait for the AT state to be promoted to the second RT mode, so this transition chance management process ends. As a result, the game state becomes the AT state and the ART state, which is the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has started is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 352 . By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has started, and then performs an effect corresponding to the ART state. An upper lamp 332 , a speaker 333 and an image display device 334 are used. After that, the value of the stock benefit counter provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S4909). The stock privilege counter is a counter for specifying the presence or absence of the stock privilege and the value of the stock privilege in the main MPU 342 .

If it is not the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for the ART ready state to be promoted to the second RT mode, so the ART ready state flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1". (step S4911). The ART preparation state flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 342 that it is in the ART preparation state.

Returning to the description of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 is 1 or more, or when the ART preparation state flag in the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" , an affirmative determination is made in step S4804. In this case, on condition that the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S4807: YES), ART preparation state processing is executed (step S4808).

In the ART preparation state processing, it is determined whether promotion to the second RT mode has occurred or not, and if promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag of the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game state shifts from the AT state to the ART state. Also, a command indicating that the ART state has started is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 352 . By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state has started, and then performs an effect corresponding to the ART state. The upper lamp 332 , speaker 333 and image display device 334 are used.

When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether or not the ART ready state flag is set to "1", the winning is made with the index value IV = 1 to 3. In this case, the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is notified so as to enable establishment of a bell prize. Also, if the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether or not the ART preparation state flag is set to "1", the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 91) or the first RT mode lottery The order of stopping the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the 1st RT replay winning prize or the 2nd RT replay winning prize when winning is won with any of the index values IV = 9 to 12 in the table (Fig. 93) is notified. . Also, if the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether or not the ART ready state flag is set to "1", the index value IV= in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 93) If any one of 13 to 18 is won, the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R for establishing a normal replay winning prize is notified.

If a negative determination is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing ART state processing.

First, 1 is added to the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5001). The number-of-advantage-games counter 344b is a counter for counting the number of games played from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the number-of-ART games counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0". The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. . That is, the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b is used to count the total number of games that have occurred in the ART state multiple times.

Thereafter, RT mode transition processing is executed (step S5002). In the RT mode transition processing, when it is specified that the first RT replay win has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and when it is specified that the second RT replay win has occurred, the RT mode is shifted to the second RT mode. When it is specified that the first fall replay win has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the second fall replay win has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

After that, it is determined whether or not a special combination has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 90) for the combination in this game (step S5003). A special win means any of the index values IV=4-6. If the special combination is won (step S5003: YES), a lottery process for adding the number of continuous games is executed (step S5004). In the lottery process for adding the number of continuous games, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state, and if so, the number of games to be added is determined. In the continuous game number addition lottery process, the continuous game number addition lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343, and periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) is read in the main RAM 344. The value of the updated number-of-games lottery counter is read, and the value of the lottery counter is checked against the number-of-continued-games addition lottery table. The number-of-continued-games addition lottery table is set so that the probability of the addition occurring increases in the order of IV=4→IV=5→IV=6, and the expected number of games to be obtained for the additional games increases in that order. ing. If the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games wins an additional lottery (step S5005: YES), the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is added to the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 (step S5006). .

When a negative determination is made in step S5003, when a negative determination is made in step S5005, or when the process of step S5006 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 (step S5007). Then, if the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S5008: YES), end processing of the ART state is executed (step S5009). In the end processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 352 . By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 executes the effect indicating that the ART state has ended, and then the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state is executed. control each of the

Returning to the description of the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the processing of step S4806 is executed, when the processing of step S4808 is executed, or when the processing of step S4809 is executed, the game end command is sent to the effect side MPU 352. (step S4810). When the effect-side MPU 352 receives the game end command, it controls the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the effect being executed in the current game is ended. Thereafter, game management processing is executed (step S4811).

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing game management processing.

In the game management process, if the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is not set to "1" (step S5101: NO), the value of the total number of games counter 344a of the main RAM 344 is a value corresponding to the number of management trigger games. It is determined whether or not it is "3000" or more (step S5102). The number of management trigger games is not limited to 3000 games, and may be 6000 games, for example. In addition, the number of management trigger games is not limited to a configuration that is set to less than the maximum number of games that can be completed in one business day at the amusement hall, but is set to about the maximum number of games. The number of games may be set to be equal to or greater than the maximum number of games. If the value of the total game number counter 344a is greater than or equal to the number of management trigger games (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main side RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated ( step S5103). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result=“value of number-of-advantage-games counter 344b”/“value of number-of-total-games counter 344a”.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds the ratio of the regulation object (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value calculated in step S5103 exceeds "0.7", which is the ratio of the regulation object. In other words, when the total number of games in all gaming states including the normal gaming state, BB state, AT state and ART state reaches 3000 games, the game is completed in the ART state or the AT state after the ART state is started. It is determined whether or not the total number of games played exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of the 3000 games.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, the number of restricted games is calculated (step S5105). In the regulated game number calculation process, the regulated number of games for which transition to the AT state or ART state is prohibited is calculated in order to ensure that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is below the ratio of the regulated target. Specifically, the number of regulated games = "value of number-of-advantage-games counter 344b" - "value of total-number-of-games counter 344a" x "percentage of restricted games (that is, '0.7')) + number of additional games (specifically practically "100"). Then, the value of the calculated restricted game number is set in the restricted game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5106). The restricted game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 342 to specify the number of games for which the transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited. Also, the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5107). This prohibits the transition to the AT state and the ART state.

After that, when the ART ready state flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5108: YES), as various clearing processes, the ART ready state flag is cleared to "0" and the ART game of the main RAM 344 is cleared. The number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5109). As a result, when the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" in the ART preparation state, the ART preparation state ends without transition to the ART state. In this case, since the AT state ends, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning prize or the second RT replay winning prize is not notified, and the first falling replay is not executed. The stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for avoiding the establishment of a winning prize or a second falling replay winning prize is not notified. After that, normal return processing is executed (step S5110). In normal return processing, a normal return command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 352 . When the effect-side MPU 352 receives the normal return command, the effect indicating that the ART preparation state is terminated without the transition to the ART state and returns to the normal game state is executed, and then the game state returns to the normal game state. Each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 is controlled so that the corresponding effect is executed.

If "1" is not set in the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ART game number counter of the main RAM 344 is 1 or more (step S5111). . If the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S5111: YES), that is, if the player is in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S5112). As a result, when the advantage restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" in the ART state, the ART state ends even if the number of games in the ART state remains. In this case, since the AT state ends, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning prize or the second RT replay winning prize is not notified, and the first falling replay is not executed. The stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for avoiding the establishment of a winning prize or a second falling replay winning prize is not notified.

Thereafter, ART state end processing is executed (step S5113). In the end processing, a command indicating that the ART state has ended is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 352, as in step S5009 in the ART state processing (FIG. 99). By receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 executes the effect indicating that the ART state has ended, and then the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333 and the image display device 334 so that the effect corresponding to the normal game state is executed. control each of the The effect executed in this case is executed when the processing of step S5009 in the ART state processing (FIG. 99) is executed, that is, when the value of the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". Same as the performance. As a result, when the ART state ends, when the ART state ends when the advantageous regulation flag of the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" in the middle of the ART state, and when the ART state ends It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which of the cases in which the ART state is terminated when the number of continuous games of becomes "0".

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101(a), in the ART state, the image display device 334 selects one of the index values IV=1 to 3 and the index value IV=9 or later in the winning lottery process (FIG. 90). If a win is made in the above, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M and 316R is notified. In FIG. 101(a), an image G1 indicating that the middle reel 316M should be stopped first, an image G2 indicating that the left reel 316L should be stopped next, and an image G3 indicating that the right reel 316R should be stopped last. is displayed. In the situation where the image informing the stopping order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is displayed in this way, the upper left corner portion of the image display device 334 shows the ART state of the main side RAM 344 since the current ART state started. A completed game number image G4 (specifically, an image of "30 games in progress") indicating the number of games completed before the value of the game counter reaches "0" is displayed. In the lower part of the image display device 334, a character image G5 reading "How long will it continue?" is displayed.

However, no image is displayed on the image display device 334 to inform the remaining number of continuous games in the current ART state, that is, the value set in the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 344 . In addition, the notification, including the image display device 334, that enables the player to recognize the remaining number of continuous games in the current ART state is not executed. As a result, when the value of the total number-of-games counter 344a exceeds the value corresponding to the number of management trigger games, the ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b to the value of the total number-of-games counter 344a exceeds the regulated ratio. In this case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated even in the middle of the ART state, the termination of the ART state is due to the forcible termination, or the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state is "0". It is possible to make it impossible for the player to grasp whether it is due to the fact that it has become.

Returning to the explanation of the number-of-games management process (Fig. 100), when the process of step S5110 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S5111, or when the process of step S5113 is executed, the total number-of-games counter of the main side RAM 344 344a and the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b of the main-side RAM 344 are each cleared to "0" (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5102 or if a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process of step S5114 is not executed. As a result, on the condition that the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes the number of management trigger games and the AT state and ART state execution restrictions occur, management is performed using the total game number counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b. The existing game history is once cleared to "0".

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing of step S5114 may be executed even when a negative determination is made in step S5104. In this case, when the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games, the total number of games is The gaming history managed using the counter 344a and the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b is once cleared to "0".

If "1" is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344, the transition chance management process (FIG. 98) makes an affirmative determination in step S4902. In this case, a lottery process for granting stock benefits is executed (step S4912). In the stock privilege giving lottery process, it is determined whether or not to give the stock privilege. Specifically, in the stock privilege grant lottery process, the stock privilege grant lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV=4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343, and periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) is read in the main RAM 344. The value of the stock privilege lottery counter that is updated every period) is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is checked against the stock privilege provision lottery table. The stock privilege grant lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the stock privilege increases in the order of IV=4→IV=5→IV=6. If the stock privilege grant lottery process wins grant (step S4913: YES), the value of the stock privilege counter provided in the main side RAM 344 is incremented by 1 (step S4914).

Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101(b), when the value of the stock privilege counter is 1 or more, the image display device 334 displays a stock privilege image G6 indicating that the stock privilege is given. be done. Also, the same number of privilege number images G7 as the number of granted stock privileges are displayed. In the case of FIG. 101(b), since the value of the stock privilege counter is "2", two privilege number images G7 are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the stock privilege is given, and also to make the player recognize the number of the given stock privilege.

If a stock privilege is provided, in step S4903 of the transfer chance management process (FIG. 98), the transfer lottery table corresponding to the value of the given stock privilege is read. In this case, a transfer lottery table is read that is advantageous to the player as the value of the stock privilege increases. Specifically, as already explained, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "0", there is a 5% probability that the AT transfer will be won if the index value IV = 4 is won. It is set so that if the winning is made with the index value IV=5, there is a 10% chance that the AT transition will be won, and if the winning is made with the index value IV=6, there is a 15% chance that the AT transition will be won. ing. On the other hand, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "1", if a win is made with the index value IV=4, there is a 15% probability that the AT transfer will be won, and the index value IV= It is set so that when winning with 5, AT transition wins with a probability of 20%, and when winning with index value IV=6, AT transition wins with a probability of 25%. In addition, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "2", if the index value IV = 4 is won, there is a 25% probability that the AT transfer will be won, and the index value IV = 5 will be won. In the case of , AT transition is won with a probability of 30%, and when it is won with the index value IV=6, it is set to be AT transition with a probability of 35%. In addition, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "3", if the index value IV = 4 is won, the AT transfer is won with a probability of 35%, and the index value IV = 5 is won. In the case of , AT shift wins with a probability of 40%, and when the index value IV=6 wins, AT shift wins with a probability of 45%. In addition, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "4", when winning with index value IV = 4, there is a 45% probability that AT transfer will be won, and with index value IV = 5. In the case of , the AT shift wins with a probability of 50%, and when the index value IV=6 wins, the AT shift wins with a probability of 55%. In addition, in the transition lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "5", if the index value IV = 4, the AT transition will be won with a probability of 55%, and the index value IV = 5 will be won. In the case of , AT shift wins with a probability of 60%, and when the index value IV=6 wins, AT shift wins with a probability of 65%. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the granting of the stock privilege, and even in a situation where the advantage regulation flag of the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" It is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with having won the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90). In addition, since the process of clearing the stock privilege counter of the main side RAM 344 to "0" is executed when the AT transition is won in the AT transition lottery process, the AT transition is performed in the AT transition lottery process until the AT transition lottery process is won. Your odds of winning won't decrease.

Also, if a stock privilege has been granted, in step S4906 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), the initial number-of-games lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock privilege is read. In this case, the number-of-initial-games lottery table is read out which is more advantageous to the player as the value of the stock privilege increases. Specifically, as already explained, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "0", the probability of selecting 50 games is 90%, and the probability of selecting 100 games is 90%. 9% and 1% probability that 200 games will be selected. On the other hand, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "1", the probability of selecting 50 games is 80%, and the probability of selecting 100 games is 14%. , the probability that 200 games will be selected is 6%. In addition, in the initial game lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "2", the probability of selecting 50 games is 70%, the probability of selecting 100 games is 19%, and the probability of selecting 100 games is 200 games. is selected with a probability of 11%. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "3", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 60%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 24%, and the probability that 100 games will be selected is 200 games. is selected with a probability of 16%. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "4", the probability of selecting 50 games is 50%, the probability of selecting 100 games is 29%, and the probability of selecting 200 games is 50%. is selected with a probability of 21%. In addition, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is "5", the probability that 50 games will be selected is 40%, the probability that 100 games will be selected is 34%, and the probability that 100 games will be selected is 200 games. is selected with a probability of 26%. With the above configuration, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the granting of the stock privilege, and even in a situation where the advantage regulation flag of the main side RAM 344 is set to "1" It is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with having won the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90).

Returning to the description of the game management process (FIG. 100), if the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5101: YES), the value of the regulation game number counter of the main RAM 344 is subtracted by 1. (Step S5115). Then, if the value of the regulation game number counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5116: YES), the advantage regulation flag of the main side RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). As a result, the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is cancelled. Incidentally, the value of the restricted game number counter is not notified, and the notification indicating that the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is not performed. This makes it impossible for the player to know when the regulation will be lifted.

Next, the management processing executed by the main MPU 342 for managing the game history and notifying the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the management process is executed at step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, the value of the total number of games counter 344a of the main RAM 344 is grasped (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous number of games counter 344b of the main RAM 344 is grasped (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b of the main-side RAM 344 to the value of the number-of-total-games counter 344a is calculated (step S5203). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result=“value of number-of-advantage-games counter 344b”/“value of number-of-total-games counter 344a”. Then, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 100's place is displayed on the first notification display device 346, the 10's place is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the 1's place is displayed on the second display device 347. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are controlled to be displayed on the third notification display device 348 (step S5204). The above calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346 and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 347. , "5" is displayed on the third notification display device 348 . Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 347. "0" is displayed on the display device 348 for 3 information.

By executing the management process as described above, the management result of the game history is always displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and the manager of the game hall can access the front door 312. is opened and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are viewed, it is possible to grasp the management result of the game history. Also, the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 88) is executed in a period shorter than the shortest period required to complete one game, and more specifically, the shortest period required from the end of one game to the start of the next game. It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the management result of the game history up to the last completed game by viewing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 .

Next, the flowchart of FIG. 103 is used for the lighting processing for executing the light emission control of the lighting devices 349a and 349b provided for the purpose of irradiating the main control device 340 with light when the front door 312 is opened. Description will be made with reference to this. The lighting process is executed at step S4514 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

When light is not emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: NO), it is determined whether or not the front door 312 is open based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e. (Step S5302). If the front door 312 is open (step S5302: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 312 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e, it is determined whether or not the open angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined open angle. This predetermined opening angle is set as an angle that is 86% of the maximum opening angle of the front door 312 . Specifically, since the maximum opening angle of the front door 312 is when the front door 312 is opened at 90° with respect to the housing 311, the predetermined state is when the front door 312 is opened at about 77° with respect to the housing 311. is set to an opening angle of If an affirmative determination is made in step S5303, that is, if the front door 312 is not closed and the opening angle of the front door 312 is 77° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5304). As a result, the irradiation range IR including the main controller 340 is irradiated with light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b. This light irradiation state continues until the process of step S5306, which will be described later, is executed.

When light is emitted from the lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: YES), based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e, the front door 312 is closed or the front door 312 is open. It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S5305). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, output of drive signals to the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped (step S5306). As a result, the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b are brought into the non-illumination state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b to the irradiation range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 312 and the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b). FIG. 104(a) shows the state of the front door 312, and FIG. 104(b) shows the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b. In the following description, FIGS. 105(a) and 105(b) will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the front door 312 is in an open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle. ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b when the opening angle of the front door 312 is a maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

First, a case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a situation where the opening angle of the front door 312 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the front door 312 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing t1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104(b), light irradiation from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing t1. After that, at timing t2, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped before the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle. In this state, light is emitted from a pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b toward the main controller 340 as shown in FIG. 105(a). As a result, even when the front door 312 is slightly opened, the main controller 340 is brightly illuminated, so that the manager of the game hall can use the board box 345 of the main controller 340 and the first to third notifications. It is possible to visually confirm the display contents of the display devices 346 to 348 for the user. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 312 to the end during the confirmation work, the confirmation work can be facilitated.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at timing t3, and the front door 312 is closed at timing t4. In this case, the light irradiation from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Next, a case where the front door 312 is opened until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the front door 312 is closed, the operation to open the front door 312 is started at time t5. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104(b), light irradiation from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing t5. After that, at the timing of t6, the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. 104(a). As a result, the light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 104(b).

After that, at timing t7, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped when the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105(b), the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b does not irradiate the main controller 340 with light. When the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle as in the case where the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle, the inside of the housing 311 is illuminated by the light of the in-store lighting of the game hall or the sunlight. . In this case, if the main controller 340 is illuminated by the lighting devices 349a and 349b, the visibility of the main controller 340 and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be lowered. be done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, such inconvenience occurs by stopping the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b. It is possible to prevent

After that, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing t8, and the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at the timing t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 104(b), light irradiation from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing t9. After that, as shown in FIG. 104(a), the front door 312 is closed at the timing t10. In this case, at the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 104(b), light irradiation from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The total number of games played regardless of the gaming state is counted by a total game number counter 344a of the main side RAM 344, and the number of games played in the ART state or in the AT state after the ART state is started is the main number. The number of advantageous games counter 344b of the side RAM 344 is accumulated and counted. Then, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and if the calculated ratio is the ratio to be regulated, the progress of the game is restricted. As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the mode of occurrence of the ART state, and if the mode of occurrence of the ART state does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game. can be dealt with.

When the progress of the game is restricted according to the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the progress of the game is restricted such that the ratio is out of the regulated ratio. As a result, even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes a regulated ratio, it is possible to keep the ratio within the range assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310. .

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio to be regulated, the ART state is terminated even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 344 is not "0". As a result, it is possible to forcibly end the ART state when the above ratio becomes a regulated ratio, and the manner in which the ART state occurs does not match the manner assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the game state.

When the total number of games measured by the total number of games counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games, which is the number of games greater than the number of games in which the ART state continues to be initially set when the ART state is newly started. In this situation, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and the ART state is forcibly terminated when the calculated ratio is the ratio subject to regulation. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency of forced termination of the ART state.

In the ART state, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state is not reported. As a result, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becoming the regulated ratio, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes a regulation target ratio, the transition to the ART state is regulated. As a result, it is possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the ART state according to the mode of occurrence of the ART state, and it is possible to prevent the mode of occurrence of the ART state from matching the mode assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the game state.

Depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the period during which the transition to the ART state is restricted varies. This makes it possible to prevent the restriction on the transition to the ART state from being set too small or too large regardless of the ratio.

If the special combination is won in the combination lottery process (Fig. 90) in a situation where the transition to the ART state is blocked because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is a regulated ratio. , the stock privilege is given as an alternative privilege, although the processing for determining whether to shift to the ART state is not executed. This prevents the player from thinking that it was useless when winning the special combination in the lottery process (FIG. 90) in the situation where the shift to the ART state is forcibly blocked. It becomes possible to

The more stock benefits given, the more advantageous it is for the player. As a result, even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation of winning the special combination in the combination lottery process (Fig. 90). Become.

If the stock privilege is given, the corresponding notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the desire to continue the game even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented.

When the stock benefit is given, the transition to the ART state is likely to occur after the state in which the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked is released. This makes it possible to associate the granting of the stock privilege with the transition to the ART state. Therefore, even if a special winning combination is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 90) in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly prevented, the player is instructed to move to the ART state. It is possible to expect.

Since the illumination devices 349a and 349b for illuminating the main controller 340 are provided, it becomes easier to perform the confirmation work of the main controller 340 by opening the front door 312. FIG. In this case, when the front door 312 is closed, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illumination state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illumination devices 349a and 349b from being in an unnecessarily illuminated state when the confirmation of the main controller 340 is not performed. Further, when the front door 312 is opened, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are automatically illuminated. As a result, it is not necessary to separately perform an operation to bring the lighting devices 349a and 349b into the lighting state, so that the confirmation work of the main control device 340 can be easily performed.

The illumination devices 349a and 349b are provided inside the housing 311 in which the main controller 340 is provided. This makes it easier to illuminate the main controller 340 by the illumination devices 349a and 349b in response to the opening operation of the front door 312. FIG.

The illumination devices 349a and 349b are not illuminated even when the front door 312 is arranged in any open position, but the illumination devices 349a and 349b are selectively illuminated in some open positions. state. As a result, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are set to the lighting state only in favorable conditions when confirming the main controller 340, and if the lighting devices 349a and 349b are set to the lighting state, confirmation of the main controller 340 becomes rather difficult. The illumination devices 349a and 349b can be brought into a non-illumination state.

When the front door 312 is in the maximum open position, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illumination state. As a result, when the main controller 340 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminating state, so that the lighting by the lighting devices 349a and 349b rather than the main controller 340 It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of making it difficult to confirm.

<Another form of the seventeenth embodiment>
The total number of games played regardless of the game state and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the ART state, are stored as history information, and the number of advantageous games relative to the total number of games is stored. However, it is not limited to this, and in the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the lottery, the number of winning times of the predetermined combination to be selected and the total number of games are stored as history information, The winning probability of the predetermined combination may be calculated. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is individually stored as history information, and the first predetermined combination is stored as history information. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins for each combination may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning may be calculated for each combination. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the combination to be managed.

Further, the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games played may be stored as history information, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. Also, the combination of the total number of game media provided and the total number of games is stored as history information for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal game state, and the number of game media provided per unit number of games is calculated. The BB state, the ART state, and the normal game state may be individually calculated.

Further, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games played in the gaming state other than the BB state may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the BB state may be calculated. Also, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games played in the gaming state other than the ART state may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the ART state may be calculated. Also, the total number of transitions to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games played in the game states other than the BB state and the ART state are stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the BB state and the ART state is calculated. It is good also as a structure which calculates.

The display of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be configured to start when the check result display period is reached and end when the check result display period ends. . In addition, when the front door 312 is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 that the front door 312 is opened with respect to the housing 311 The display of the result is started, and when the sensor for detecting the opening of the front door 312 detects that the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311, the first to third notification display devices The display of each judgment result in 346 to 348 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 .

- Although the configuration is such that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state is not reported, the configuration may be such that the number of continuous games is reported. In this case, when the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the reason for the forced termination may be notified by the image display device 334. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the ART state is forcibly ended even though the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state is not "0". becomes.

In addition, if the number of remaining games in the ART state is greater than the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the ART state is forced. The number of remaining games until the game is terminated may be notified as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state. In this case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the ART state is terminated until the number of games at which the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of games remaining in the ART state or the number of advantageous games to the total number of games reaches 10 games. The number of games remaining until the end of the ART state may be notified when the number of games reaches 10 games. In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that the remaining 10 games or less are left in the ART state, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated. It becomes possible.

・If the number of remaining games in the ART state exceeds the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the remaining ART state will continue. Even if there is an opportunity to increase the number of games, the configuration may be such that the increase does not occur.

・If the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the next ART state will be determined based on the number of games remaining in the ART state at the time of the forced termination. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the degree of advantage of is changed. For example, the greater the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state at the time of forced termination, the more the initial number of continuation games in the next ART state increases or tends to increase. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy to generate|occur|produce addition of. As a result, when the ART state is forced to end when the number of remaining games in the ART state is large, it is possible to compensate according to the remaining number of games to be played.

・The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are used. It is good also as a structure performed. As a result, the credit display section 335 and the given number display section 336 can be used together as a display section for notifying the calculation result. Further, in this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, similar to the thirteenth embodiment, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. good. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed in the credit display section 335, and the calculation result or the content of the calculation result for the event to be notified is displayed in the given number display section 336. may be configured such that information corresponding to is displayed. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

A counter for measuring the game history up to the number of management trigger games (specifically, 3000 games) and a counter for measuring the game history beyond the number of management trigger games may be provided. In this case, the former counter is used to perform calculation using the game history until the number of management trigger games is reached, and the control corresponding to the calculation result is performed. Then, when the calculation is performed, the former counter is cleared to "0". On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the game history without being cleared to "0" even if the above calculation is performed, and perform calculation using the cumulative game history. As a result, it is possible to execute control corresponding to the calculation result each time the number of management trigger games is reached, and to manage the game history in a range exceeding the number of management trigger games.

・The subject forcibly terminated in relation to the management result of the game history is not limited to an advantageous game state such as an ART state, and may be a disadvantageous game state.

A configuration may be provided in which an operation unit is operated to forcibly bring the illumination devices 349a and 349b into the non-illumination state even when the front door 312 is in the open state. In this case, when illumination by the illumination devices 349a and 349b is unnecessary, the illumination devices 349a and 349b can be brought into a non-illumination state. In addition, the operation unit may be configured to be provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 312 is closed, and cannot be operated when the front door 312 is closed, and can be operated when the front door 312 is opened. It may be configured to be provided at a position where it can be operated immediately.

When the front door 312 is open, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are always illuminated, and when the front door 312 is closed, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are always non-illuminated. may be configured.

・Even if the front door 312 changes from the closed state to the open state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are maintained in the non-lighting state until the predetermined opening angle is reached. Devices 349a and 349b may be configured to be in the illumination state. In addition to this configuration, the illumination devices 349a and 349b may be configured to be in a non-illumination state when the front door 312 is at the maximum open position as in the above embodiment.

- It is good also as a structure with which the intensity|strength of the light irradiated from apparatus 349a, 349b for illumination changes according to the opening angle of the front door 312. FIG. For example, when the front door 312 is in a closed state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illumination state or a relatively weak lighting state, and the front door 312 is in an open state, and the opening angle of the front door 312 is a predetermined opening. If the opening angle of the front door 312 is less than or equal to the predetermined opening angle, the lighting state is relatively strong, and if the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle, the lighting state is relatively weak.

<Eighteenth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the seventeenth embodiment in the configuration for managing the game history in the slot machine 310 . The configuration different from that of the seventeenth embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the seventeenth embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 106(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM 344. FIG.

The main RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 344a and an advantageous game number counter 344b as in the seventeenth embodiment. The total number of games counter 344a is a counter for counting the number of games played regardless of whether the game state is normal game state, BB state, AT state or ART state, as in the seventeenth embodiment. is. Since the total number of games counter 344a can measure up to 3000 games, the total number of games counter 344a has a data capacity capable of counting the number of games. Specifically, the total number of games counter 344a has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total number of games counter 344a keeps the counted game number information as long as the main side RAM 344 is not cleared when the power is turned on after that. Hold.

The number-of-advantage-games counter 344b counts the number of games played from the occurrence of the transition to the ART state until the value of the number-of-ART games counter in the main-side RAM 344 becomes "0", as in the seventeenth embodiment. It is a counter for measuring. The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. That is, the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b is used to count the total number of games that have occurred in the ART state multiple times. Since the number of games of up to 3000 games can be counted by the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b, the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b has a data capacity capable of counting the number of games. Specifically, the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the advantageous game number counter 344b retains information on the number of games being counted as long as the main side RAM 344 is not cleared when the power is turned on after that. Hold.

A total game number counter 361 is provided in the main RAM 344 . Similar to the total game counter 344a, the total game number counter 361 is a counter for counting the number of games completed regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, BB state, AT state or ART state. be. However, the total number of games counter 361 maintains counting over the number of games exceeding 3000 games, and even if the slot machine 310 is turned off, the power is turned on after that. Information on the number of games being counted is retained unless clear processing of the main side RAM 344 is executed. The total number of games counter 361 has a data capacity capable of counting the number of games over a plurality of business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total number of games counter 361 has a data capacity of 2 bytes. With a data capacity of 2 bytes, for example, if the maximum number of games that can be executed in one business day is 8000, the total number of games counter 361 can continuously measure the number of games for five years or more. It becomes possible.

The main-side RAM 344 is provided with a total accumulation buffer 362 . FIG. 106(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters 362a to 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. As shown in FIG. The total accumulation buffer 362 includes a total total payout counter 362a, a total advantageous counter 362b, and a total bonus counter 362c.

The total total payout counter 362a is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, BB state, AT state or ART state. . The total total payout counter 362a counts the total number of payouts of game media being counted as long as the main-side RAM 344 is not cleared when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off. retain information; The total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity of 3 bytes. With a data volume of 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of game media paid out in one business day is "120000", the total total number of game media paid out is measured over four months or more by the total total payout counter 362a. It is possible to do

The total advantage counter 362b measures the total number of game media paid out to the player from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". is a counter for The value of the total advantage counter 362b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter of the main side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. In other words, the total advantageous counter 362b is used to measure the total number of game media paid out in the ART state multiple times. Even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total advantageous counter 362b counts the total number of payouts of game media that is being counted as long as the main side RAM 344 is not cleared when the power is turned on after that. retain information; The total advantageous counter 362b has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media over a plurality of business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total advantage counter 362b has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data volume is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of game media paid out in one business day is "120000", the total number of game media paid out is measured by the total advantage counter 362b over four months or more. It is possible to do

The total bonus counter 362c is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player in the BB state. The value of the total bonus counter 362c is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the BB state ends. That is, the total bonus counter 362c is used to count the total number of game media paid out in the BB state a plurality of times. Even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total bonus counter 362c counts the total number of payouts of game media, as long as the main side RAM 344 is not cleared when the power is turned on after that. retain information; The total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media over a plurality of business days without reaching the upper limit. Specifically, the total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data volume is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of game media paid out in one business day is "120000", the total bonus counter 362c measures the total number of game media paid out over four months or more. It is possible to do

The main RAM 344 is provided with a first accumulation buffer 363 and a second accumulation buffer 364 . FIG. 106(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters 363a to 363c provided in the first accumulation buffer 363, and FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining contents of counters 364a to 364c; As shown in FIG. 106(c), the first accumulation buffer 363 includes a first total payout counter 363a, a first during-advantage counter 363b, and a first during-bonus counter 363c. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106(d), the second accumulation buffer 364 includes a second total payout counter 364a, a second in-advantage counter 364b, and a second in-bonus counter 364c.

Similar to the total total payout counter 362a, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a pay out to the player regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, BB state, AT state or ART state. A counter for measuring the total number of game media that have been put out. Since the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, the total number of game media can be measured. It's becoming Specifically, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a are counted even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off as long as the main side RAM 344 is not cleared when the power is turned on after that. Holds information on the total number of payouts of playing game media.

The first during-advantage counter 363b and the second during-advancement counter 364b, like the total-advantage counter 362b, operate from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 becomes "0". This is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player during the period. The value of the first during-advantage counter 363b and the value of the second during-advantage counter 364b are "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main-side RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. Maintained without being cleared. That is, the first during-advantage counter 363b and the second during-advantage counter 364b are used to measure the total number of game media paid out in the ART state a plurality of times. Since the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games is measured by the first medium-advantage counter 363b and the second medium-advantage counter 364b, the total number of game mediums can be measured. It's becoming Specifically, the first mid-advantage counter 363b and the second mid-advantage counter 364b each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. Note that even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, the first during-advantage counter 363b and the second during-advantage counter 364b are counted unless the main-side RAM 344 is cleared when the power is subsequently turned on. Holds information on the total number of payouts of playing game media.

The first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are counters for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player in the BB state, like the total bonus counter 362c. The value of the first bonus counter 363c and the value of the second bonus counter 364c are maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the BB state ends. That is, the first during-bonus counter 363c and the second during-bonus counter 364c are used to measure the total number of payouts of game media in the BB state a plurality of times. Since the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games is measured by the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c, the total number of game media can be measured. It's becoming Specifically, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are counted even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on after that. Holds information on the total number of payouts of playing game media.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), the main RAM 344 is provided with a calculation area 365 for total accumulation, a calculation area 366 for first accumulation, and a calculation area 367 for second accumulation. A total cumulative payout counter 362a and a total advantageous counter 362b provided in a total cumulative total calculation area 365 calculate the total number of game media paid out in the ART state with respect to the total number of game media paid out. and stores the information of the result of calculating the ratio of the game media in the BB state with respect to the total number of payouts of the game media using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362 Stores the information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts. The first accumulation calculation area 366 utilizes the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantage counter 363b provided in the first accumulation buffer 363 to calculate the amount of game media in a period that continues over 6000 games. A first total payout counter 363a and a first bonus counter 363c provided in the first accumulation buffer 363 are stored as well as storing information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of payouts of is used to store the information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games. A second cumulative calculation area 367 uses a second total payout counter 364a and a second advantage counter 364b provided in a second cumulative total buffer 364 to calculate the amount of game media in a period of continuous 6000 games. A second total payout counter 364a and a second bonus counter 364c provided in the second accumulation buffer 364 are stored while storing information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of payouts of is used to store the information of the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games.

With the provision of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 as described above, the total number of game media paid out in the ART state with respect to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games It is possible to calculate the ratio and the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out in a continuous period of 6000 games. In this case, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are used such that the start and end of the period to be managed are offset from each other. Specifically, the total number of games to be managed by each cumulative buffer 363, 364 is A (specifically, 6000 games), and the number of cumulative buffers 363, 364 is B (specifically, 2). In this case, the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of A/B games (specifically, 3000 games). Further, when one period to be managed in the first accumulation buffer 363 ends, the next period to be managed in the first accumulation buffer 363 starts from the next game, and the second accumulation buffer When one managed period ends in 364, the next managed period in the second accumulation buffer 364 starts from the next game. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period to be managed by the second accumulation buffer 364 repeatedly occur with the start and end of these periods shifted by a certain number of games. becomes.

FIG. 107 is a time chart showing how the game history is managed in this embodiment. 107(a) shows the timing when 3000 games have passed, FIG. 107(b) shows the game execution timing, FIG. 107(c) shows the update timing of the total accumulation buffer 362, and FIG. 107(d). shows the update timing of the first accumulation buffer 363, FIG. 107(e) shows the initialization timing of the first accumulation buffer 363, FIG. 107(f) shows the update timing of the second accumulation buffer 364, FIG. 107(g) shows the initialization timing of the second accumulation buffer 364, and FIG. 107(h) shows the management result calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 and the The timing of switching the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 from one to the other of the management results calculated in the above manner is shown.

At the timing of t1, the slot machine 310 is turned on and supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started. In this case, the main RAM 344 is cleared, so that the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. ), the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to "0". Even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started, if the clearing process of the main RAM 344 is not executed, the first accumulative The various counters 363a to 363c of the buffer 363 and the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are not cleared to "0", and the values at the previous power-off of the slot machine 310 are maintained as they are.

After that, one game is executed at timings t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6, respectively, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Then, at the timing of t6, 3000 games have passed as shown in FIG. 107(a). Assuming that game media are paid out in each of these games, at each of timings t2 to t6, update processing of total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c). As shown in FIG. 107(d), update processing of the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed. Note that in a game in which no game media are paid out, the process of updating the total accumulation buffer 362 and the first accumulation buffer 363 is not executed. At each of the timings t2 to t6, the updating process of the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed as shown in FIG. 107(f). Since the period to be managed in the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period to be managed in the second accumulation buffer 364 are shifted by 3000 games in both the start and end periods, these accumulation buffers 363 and 364 When the initialization process is executed, the update process of the second accumulation buffer 364 is put on standby until 3000 games have passed since the initialization process was executed.

After that, one game is executed at timings t7, t8, t9, and t10, respectively, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that game media are paid out in each of these games, at each of timing t7 to timing t10, update processing of total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c). As shown in (d), update processing of the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107(f), update processing of the second accumulation buffer 364 is executed. It should be noted that in a game in which no game media are paid out, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

The timing of t10 is the timing after 3000 games have passed from the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 107(a). In other words, it is the timing when 6000 games, which is the period to be managed once, have elapsed since the first accumulation buffer 363 was updated. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 . This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. After the management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 107(h), it becomes the switching timing of the display object. When the main side RAM 344 is cleared, the display contents corresponding to the management results of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 become initial display contents that do not correspond to any management results. The initial display content continues during the period in which the management results of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 are displayed until the first management result is calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 . By storing the management result information calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 at the timing of t10 in the first accumulation calculation area 366, the accumulation buffers 363, The display content of the management result of 364 is the display content corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. This display content is displayed until the information of the management result calculated by using the second cumulative buffer 364 is stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367. It is maintained as the display contents of the management result of 364.

After that, one game is executed at each of timing t11, timing t12, timing t13, and timing t14, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that game media are paid out in each of these games, at each of timings t11 to t14, update processing of total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c). As shown in (d), update processing of the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107(f), update processing of the second accumulation buffer 364 is executed. It should be noted that in a game in which no game media are paid out, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

The timing of t14 is the timing after 3000 games have passed from the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 107(a). That is, it is the timing when 6000 games, which is a period to be managed once, have elapsed since the second accumulation buffer 364 was updated. Therefore, the management result for 6000 games is calculated using the second accumulation buffer 364 . This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. After the management result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(g).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 107(h), it becomes the switching timing of the display object. By storing the management result information calculated using the second accumulation buffer 364 at the timing of t14 in the second accumulation calculation area 367, the accumulation buffers 363, The display contents of the management result of 364 are displayed corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 367 for the second total from the display contents corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. Switch to content. This display content is displayed in the accumulation buffers of the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 is newly stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366 . 363 and 364 are maintained as display contents of management results.

After that, one game is executed at timings t15, t16, t17, and t18, respectively, as shown in FIG. 107(b). Assuming that game media are paid out in each of these games, at each of timing t15 to timing t18, update processing of total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107(c). As shown in (d), update processing of the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107(f), update processing of the second accumulation buffer 364 is executed. It should be noted that in a game in which no game media are paid out, update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362, the first accumulation buffer 363, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed.

The timing of t18 is the timing after 3000 games have passed from the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 107(a). In other words, it is the timing when 6000 games have passed since a new management target period using the first accumulation buffer 363 started. Therefore, the management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 . This calculated management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. After the management result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 107(e).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 107(h), it becomes the switching timing of the display object. By storing the management result information calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 at the timing of t18 in the first accumulation calculation area 366, the accumulation buffers 363, The display contents of the management result of 364 are displayed corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the first calculation area 366 from the display contents corresponding to the information of the management result stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. Switch to content. This display content is displayed in the accumulation buffers of the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the second accumulation buffer 364 is newly stored in the second accumulation calculation area 367 . 363 and 364 are maintained as display contents of management results.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling management of game history as described above will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing game management processing executed by the main MPU 342. FIG. The game management process is executed at step S4811 in the corresponding process (FIG. 97) at the end of the game.

First, processing for advantageous period regulation is executed (step S5401). In the processing for regulating the advantageous period, the same processing as steps S5101 to S5117 of the game management processing (FIG. 100) in the seventeenth embodiment is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a game medium has been awarded in the current game (step S5402). When game media are given (step S5402: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the total total payout counter 362a of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5403). A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the first total payout counter 363a of the buffer 363 for one total (step S5404). Also, on condition that it is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is a period before 3000 games have elapsed since the main RAM 344 was cleared (step S5405: NO), the second cumulative total buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the second total payout counter 364a (step S5406).

When the affirmative determination is made in step S5405, or when the process of step S5406 is executed, it is determined whether or not the ART state is established by determining whether or not the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 344 is 1 or more. is determined (step S5407). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5407, a value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the total advantageous counter 362b of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5408), A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the one-advantage counter 363b (step S5409). Also, on the condition that it is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is the period before 3000 games have elapsed since the main RAM 344 was cleared (step S5410: NO), the second cumulative total buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the second advantageous counter 364b (step S5411).

If a negative determination is made in step S5407, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the BB state (step S5412). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5412, a value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the total bonus counter 362c of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5413), A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the one-bonus counter 363c (step S5414). Also, on the condition that it is not the second cumulative waiting period, which is a period before 3000 games have elapsed since the main RAM 344 was cleared (step S5415: NO), the second cumulative total buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the second bonus counter 364c (step S5416).

If a negative determination is made in step S5402, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5410, if the process of step S5411 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S5412, if a positive determination is made in step S5415, or If the process of step S5416 has been executed, the total accumulation calculation process is executed (step S5417). In the calculation process, a total total payout counter 362a and a total advantageous counter 362b provided in the total accumulation buffer 362 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state to the total number of game media paid out. Then, the calculation result is stored in the total accumulation calculation area 365 . Further, in the calculation process, a total total payout counter 362a and a total bonus counter 362c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362 are used to calculate the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state to the total number of game media paid out. is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation. When the display target on the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and becomes the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display devices 346 to 348 If the display target in 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and it is the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state, the latter calculation result is notified.

Thereafter, in step S5418, target switching processing is executed. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing target switching processing. First, 1 is added to the value of the total number of games counter 361 of the main side RAM 344 (step S5501). The total number of games counter 361 is used to specify, in the main MPU 342, one period to be managed using the first accumulation buffer 363 and one period to be managed using the second accumulation buffer 364. used. After that, in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of games counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000×2n (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). When the value of the total number of games counter 361 is 3000×2n, it means that one managed period using the first accumulation buffer 363 has ended. For example, when 6,000 games have passed since the main RAM 344 was cleared, when 12,000 games have passed, and when 18,000 games have passed, etc., it becomes one management object using the first accumulation buffer 363. The period has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, calculation processing for the first total is executed (step S5503). In the calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first mid-advantage counter 363b provided in the first accumulation buffer 363 are used to calculate the total number of payouts of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. In addition, in the calculation process, the total payout of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games is The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 and becomes the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display device 346 348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the BB state is displayed, the latter calculation result is notified.

After that, the first total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5504), and the second total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5505). The first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag are displayed when the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364. Secondly, it is a flag for specifying which of these is to be displayed in the main MPU 342 . When the first cumulative display flag is set to "1" and the value of the second cumulative display flag is "0", the management result calculated using the first cumulative display buffer 363 is displayed. When the value of the first total display flag is "0" and the value of the second total display flag is set to "1", the management result calculated using the second total buffer 364 is to be displayed. . Further, when the values of both the first total display flag and the second total display flag are "0", the initial display content corresponding to neither the first total buffer 363 nor the second total buffer 364 is displayed. Be eligible.

After that, clearing processing of the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed (step S5506). As a result, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the value of the total number of games counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000×(2n+1) (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) (step S5507). When the value of the total number of games counter 361 is 3000×(2n+1), it means that one managed period using the second accumulation buffer 364 has ended. For example, when 9,000 games have passed since the main RAM 344 was cleared, when 15,000 games have passed, and when 21,000 games have passed, etc., it becomes one management object using the second accumulation buffer 364. The period has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5507, calculation processing for the second total is executed (step S5508). In the calculation process, a second total payout counter 364a and a second advantage counter 364b provided in the second accumulation buffer 364 are used to calculate the total number of payouts of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games. The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. In addition, in the calculation process, the total payout of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games is The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the second accumulation buffer 364 and becomes the ratio of the total number of payouts of the game media in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display device 346 348 is the second accumulation buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the BB state is displayed, the latter calculation result is reported.

After that, the first total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to "0" (step S5509), and the second total display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5510). Also, the clearing process of the second accumulation buffer 364 is executed (step S5511). As a result, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to "0".

Next, management processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the management process is executed at step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

First, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the display contents of the notification display devices 346 to 348 (step S5601). As the display objects of the notification display devices 346 to 348, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the total accumulation buffer 362 in the ART state and the total number of game media paid out in the total accumulation buffer 362 in the BB state are displayed. the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state in the first accumulation buffer 363; the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state in the first accumulation buffer 363; The ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state in the accumulation buffer 364, the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the BB state in the second accumulation buffer 364, and the value of the total number of games counter 344a. There is a ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, after the display content of one display target is displayed for a predetermined notification period (specifically, 5 seconds), the display content is changed to the next display target, and the display content is changed. The display content of the display target is displayed over the predetermined notification period. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, the respective ratios of the total accumulation buffer 362 are displayed first, and then the timing when the period to be managed out of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 ends. is displayed, and then the ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b to the value of the total number-of-games counter 344a is displayed. Then, the flow of switching these display objects is repeated. It should be noted that the content set at the previous update timing continues to be displayed on the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the display content update timing comes.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, update processing of the counter to be displayed is executed (step S5602). The display target counter is provided in the main RAM 344, and if the value of the display target counter is "0", the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362, and the number of game media in the ART state is If the value of the display object counter is "1", the display object of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362, and the ratio of the total number of game media to be paid out in the BB state. , if the value of the display object counter is "2", the display object of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364, and the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state is If the value of the display object counter is "3", the display object of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364, and the total payout of game media in the BB state If the value of the display object counter is "4", the display object of the notification display devices 346 to 348 becomes the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. If the value of the counter to be displayed after adding 1 is "5", the value of the counter to be displayed is cleared to "0".

After that, by determining whether or not the value of the display target counter is "0" or "1", it is determined whether or not the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the total accumulation buffer 362. is determined (step S5603). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, a setting process for displaying the type of total sum is executed (step S5604). In the setting process, if the value of the display object counter is "0", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display object counter is "1", the first notification is displayed. display device 346 for displaying "1". That is, in the present embodiment, the first notification display device 346 displays information corresponding to the type of display object in the notification display devices 346 to 348 . After that, a setting process for displaying the results of total accumulation is executed (step S5605). In the setting process, if the value of the counter to be displayed is "0", the total total amount buffer 362 stored in the total total amount calculation area 365 corresponds to the ratio of the total payout amount of game media in the ART state. This information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 . Further, if the value of the display object counter is "1", the information corresponding to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state in the total accumulation buffer 362 stored in the total accumulation calculation area 365 is It is made to be displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 . In these cases, after the ratio is displayed in %, the tens place is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the ones place is displayed on the third notification display device 348 . In this configuration, it is impossible to distinguish between 100% and less than 1%, so different displays may be made for 100% and less than 1%.

If a negative determination is made in step S5603, by determining whether the value of the display target counter is "2" or "3", the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first accumulation buffer. 363 or the second accumulation buffer 364 (step S5606). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, a partial period type display setting process is executed (step S5607). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", "2" is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is "3", the first notification is displayed. display device 346 for displaying "3".

After that, if the first total display flag of the main RAM 344 is set to "1" (step S5608: YES), setting processing for displaying the result of the first total is executed (step S5609). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", the ratio of the total number of payouts of game media in the ART state in the first accumulation buffer 363 stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366 is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 . Further, if the value of the display object counter is "3", it corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state in the first accumulation buffer 363 stored in the calculation area 366 for the first accumulation. Information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 .

If the first total display flag of the main RAM 344 is not set to "1" and the second total display flag is set to "1" (step S5610: YES), second total result display setting processing is executed (step S5611). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is "2", the ratio of the total number of game media paid out in the ART state in the second accumulation buffer 364 stored in the second accumulation calculation area 367 is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 . Further, if the value of the display object counter is "3", it corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state in the second accumulation buffer 364 stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. Information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 .

When "1" is not set to both the first total display flag and the second total display flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5610: NO), initial display setting processing is executed (step S5612). In the setting process, the display contents of the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 are made to be the initial display contents regardless of the value of the display target counter. Specifically, the letter “L”, which is not to be displayed when displaying the ratio of other situations, is displayed on both the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 . However, even in this case, the content corresponding to the value of the display object counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346 . As a result, when the initial display contents are displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348, the manager of the game hall grasps which display object it corresponds to. It becomes possible to

A negative determination in step S5606 means that the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b to the value of the number-of-total-games counter 344a. In this case, first, processing for setting the type display of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5613). In the setting process, "4" corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. FIG. Also, a setting process for displaying the result of the advantageous period ratio is executed (step S5614). In the setting process, the ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b to the value of the number-of-total-games counter 344a is calculated, and information corresponding to the calculation result is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. to be displayed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A first accumulation buffer 363 and a second accumulation buffer 364 are provided, and the first accumulation buffer 363 is used to manage a continuous period of 6000 games, and the second accumulation buffer 364 is used. A continuous period is managed over 6000 games using the first accumulation buffer 363 (hereinafter also referred to as the first period) and the second accumulation buffer 364 is used to manage the period. It partially overlaps with the period to be managed (hereinafter also referred to as the second period). As a result, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of the second period, and to calculate various ratios corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of the first period. It becomes possible to derive the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while securing the first period and the second period as the periods in which management is performed. Furthermore, even if the storage capacities of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are not excessively increased, various It becomes possible to increase the frequency of deriving the ratio.

Since both the first period and the second period end when 6000 games have passed, the conditions for ending the periods are the same. As a result, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 respectively.

When one first period ends, a new first period starts following the first period, and when one second period ends, a new second period starts following the second period and the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. As a result, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain amount of deviation has occurred.

When one first period ends, the first accumulation buffer 363 is cleared to "0", and when one second period ends, the second accumulation buffer 364 is cleared to "0". Thus, the capacity of the first accumulation buffer 363 is sufficient to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second accumulation buffer 364 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. A capacity that can be used is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the capacities of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 .

When the first period has passed, notification of various ratios corresponding to the first period is started, and when the second period has passed, notification of various ratios corresponding to the second period is started. As a result, the various ratios are notified as the first period and the second period progress, and it is possible to notify the various ratios in a situation relatively close to the current situation.

<Another Form of the Eighteenth Embodiment>
・The number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 used to calculate various ratios in the period of 6000 games is not limited to two, first accumulation buffer 363 and second accumulation buffer 364, but three. , 4 or 5 or more. If there are 3, both the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted by 2000 games each, and if there are 4, the start and end of the period managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted. are shifted by 1500 games each, and if there are five, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each accumulation buffer are shifted by 1000 games each.

The period to be managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 is not limited to 6,000 games. The number of games may be more than 6000 games, such as games. Also, the number of games is not limited to 6000 games which is divisible by the number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364, and the number of games which is not divisible by the number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 such as 6001 games may be used. If the number of games is not divisible, the total number of games to be managed by the cumulative buffers 363 and 364 is A (specifically 6001 games), and the number of cumulative buffers 363 and 364 is B (specifically 2), the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of games of the quotient of A/B (specifically, 3000 games). The start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of games added by 1 (specifically, 3001 games).

A ring buffer such as a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment, which will be described later, may be used in place of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 . Then, the result of each game is stored as history information in each of the ring buffer corresponding to the first accumulation buffer 363 and the ring buffer corresponding to the second accumulation buffer 364, and the stored history information is used. It is configured to calculate various ratios as in the eighteenth embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various ratios while partially overlapping the first period and the second period, which are periods covering 6000 games.

・The objects managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are not limited to the various ratios described above. The ratio of the value of the number-of-advantage-games counter 344b to the value of the number-of-total-games counter 344a) may be managed by the accumulation buffers 363 and 364. FIG.

<Nineteenth Embodiment>
As in the eighteenth embodiment, the first cumulative total buffer 363 and the second cumulative total buffer 364 are used to partially overlap each management target period, and at a cycle shorter than the management target period. A configuration capable of reporting the management result in each managed period may be applied to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111, the management IC 66 includes a management side I/F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a calculation result memory as in the third embodiment. 131 is provided. These functions are the same as those of the third embodiment.

In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372 . The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have the same configuration. Although the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 differ in overall data capacity, their basic configuration is a ring buffer similar to that of the history memory 117 in the third embodiment. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configurations of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. As shown in FIG.

Each of the history memories 371 and 372 is provided with history areas 371a and 372a for sequentially storing history information. In the history areas 371a and 372a, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are set with serial numbers, and history information storage areas 371b and 372b are set in one-to-one correspondence with each piece of pointer information. The history information storage areas 371b and 372b can store combinations of RTC information and correspondence information. In this case, each history information storage area 371b, 372b has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area for storing RTC information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated as an area. When it becomes necessary to store the correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10), First, date information and time information measured by the current RTC 115 are stored in the areas for storing the RTC information of the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be currently written. do. After that, the correspondence relation information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the current information storage is read from the correspondence relation areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the correspondence relation memory 116, and the read correspondence relation information is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storage 371b, 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written at present.

The history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided in such a number that it is possible to store all the history information when 30000 game balls are shot. For example, if history information is generated 40000 times at maximum in normal use until 30000 game balls are shot, 40000 or more history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided. As a result, it is possible to store history information until at least 30000 game balls are shot in the history memories 371 and 372 .

The history memories 371 and 372 are provided with pointer areas 371c and 372c separately from the history areas 371a and 372a. The pointer areas 371c and 372c store information for the management side CPU 112 to specify the pointer information currently being written in the history memories 371 and 372, respectively. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, the pointer areas 371c and 372c are set with information designating pointer information of "0" to be written. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. be. When the pointer information in the last order is to be written and the history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information in the last order, the pointer information of "0" is to be written. , the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated. As a result, when the number of pieces of history information that can be stored is exceeded and a trigger for storing history information occurs, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage areas 371b and 372b in which old history information is stored. It will happen.

In addition, when various parameters are calculated by the management side CPU 112 using the history memories 371 and 372 and the calculation results are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the history memories 371 and 372 which are referred to in the calculation are stored. 372, the history information storage areas 371b and 372b are all cleared to "0", and the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the pointer information of "0" is written. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information that has been read once from being read again.

By providing the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, it is possible to calculate various parameters using the history information during the period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. becomes possible. In this case, in the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other like the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 in the eighteenth embodiment. used in this way. Specifically, the number of discharged game balls to be managed by each history memory 371, 372 is A (specifically, 30,000), and the number of history memories 371, 372 is B (specifically, 2). ), both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of discharged game balls (specifically, 15,000) of A/B. Further, when one period to be managed in the first history memory 371 ends, the next period to be managed in the first history memory 371 is generated from the discharge of the next game ball, and the second history When one period to be managed in the second history memory 372 has ended, the next period to be managed in the second history memory 372 is generated from the discharge of the next game ball. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the period to be managed by the second history memory 372 repeatedly occur with the start and end of these periods shifted by a certain number of discharges. It will be done.

Next, a processing configuration for enabling management of game histories using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing history setting processing executed by the management side CPU 112 . Note that the history setting process is executed in step S607 in the management process (FIG. 18).

First, the number of buffers to be confirmed by the management side CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S5701). Specifically, among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored is specified, and the number of the correspondence areas is specified. The number of information is set in the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, as already explained, information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth correspondence areas 123a to 123j. do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the contents of the buffer corresponding to the current check target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are the contents of the history information write trigger (step S5702). Specifically, when the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from "0" to "1", It is determined that a write opportunity has occurred. In addition, when the current value of the counter to be confirmed is between "8" and "10", the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the counter to be confirmed is changed from "1" to "0". If so, it is determined that a write opportunity has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, RTC information, which is date information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S5703). Then, write processing to the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5704). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 371a to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371, and the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 371b of the corresponding history area 371a. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, if the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only correspondence information but also start information or end information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S5705). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 371a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 371c as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 371c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA after the clear processing of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed is 15000. It is determined whether or not it is the standby period (step S5706). In this embodiment, a clear signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when the main RAM 65 is cleared. Clear processing of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed. By executing the clear processing, the history areas 371a and 372a of the history memories 371 and 372 are all cleared to "0" and the pointer areas 371c and 372c of the history memories 371 and 372 are cleared to "0". ” is cleared. Then, when an opportunity to write the history information occurs after that, only the first history memory 371 is updated until the number of discharged pieces reaches 15,000. Both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are updated each time a write opportunity occurs.

If a negative determination is made in step S5706, writing processing to the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5707). In the write process, the pointer information in the history area 372a to be written is specified by referring to the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372, and the pointer information to be written is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 372b of the corresponding history area 372a. Also, the correspondence information is read from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current check target counter values, and the correspondence information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Further, if the correspondence information is any one of the information indicating the open/close execution mode, the information indicating the high-frequency support mode, and the information indicating the front door frame 14, the above-mentioned Not only the correspondence relationship information but also the start information or the end information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

After that, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S5708). In the updating process, the numerical value information stored in the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is read and 1 is added. It is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 372a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after the addition of 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 372c as new pointer information to be written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 372c is cleared to "0" so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

When a negative determination is made in step S5702, when an affirmative determination is made in step S5706, or when the process of step S5708 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S5709). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S5710). If the value of the confirmation object counter is 1 or more (step S5710: NO), the process after step S5702 is executed for the confirmation object corresponding to the new value of the confirmation object counter. If the value of the confirmation target counter is "0" (step S5710: YES), target switching processing is executed (step S5711).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing target switching processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been discharged from the game area PA (step S5801). When game balls are discharged (step S5801: YES), addition processing of the total discharge number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 is executed (step S5802). In the addition process, the value of the number of game balls discharged this time from the game area PA is added to the total discharge number counter. After that, in step S5803, it is determined whether or not the value of the total discharged number counter is 15000×2n (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1). When the value of the total discharged number counter is 15000×2n, it means that one managed period using the first history memory 371 has ended. For example, when 30,000 game balls have been discharged after the first history memory 371 has been cleared, when 60,000 game balls have been discharged, and when 90,000 game balls have been discharged, This means that one managed period using the first history memory 371 has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, calculation processing using the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5804). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using history information stored in the first history memory 371 . The contents of calculation of these various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Various parameters resulting from the calculation are written in the calculation result memory 131 . In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, the first history memory 371 is cleared (step S5805). As a result, the history area 371a of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S5803, it is determined whether or not the value of the total discharge number counter is 15000×(2n+1) (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) (step S5806). When the value of the total discharged number counter is 15000×(2n+1), it means that one managed period using the second history memory 372 has ended. For example, when 45,000 game balls are discharged after the second history memory 372 is cleared, when 75,000 game balls are discharged, and when 105,000 game balls are discharged, This means that one managed period using the second history memory 372 has ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5806, calculation processing using the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5807). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using history information stored in the second history memory 372 . The contents of calculation of these various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Various parameters resulting from the calculation are written in the calculation result memory 131 . In this case, if information on other calculation results is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the information on the calculation results should be written so as not to overwrite the already stored information on the calculation results. conduct. Also, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the calculation result written this time. This makes it possible to specify the timing to which the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds.

After that, clear processing of the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5808). As a result, the history area 372a of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0" and the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0".

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372 are provided, and the period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is managed by using the first history memory 371, and the second history memory 372 is used. The period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is managed using the second history memory 372, and the period managed using the first history memory 371 (hereinafter referred to as the second 1 period) and the period managed using the second history memory 372 (hereinafter also referred to as a second period) partially overlap. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results in the first period in the middle of the second period, and to derive various parameters corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of the first period. parameters can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while securing the first period and the second period as periods in which management is performed. Furthermore, even if the storage capacities of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are not excessively increased, various It is possible to increase the frequency of deriving parameters.

Since both the first period and the second period end when 30000 game balls are ejected from the game area PA, the conditions for ending the periods are the same. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, respectively.

When one first period ends, a new first period starts following the first period, and when one second period ends, a new second period starts following the second period and the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain amount of deviation has occurred.

When one first period ends, the first history memory 371 is cleared to "0", and when one second period ends, the second history memory 372 is cleared to "0". As a result, the capacity of the first history memory 371 is sufficient to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second history memory 372 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. A capacity that can be used is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the capacities of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 .

<Another Form of the Nineteenth Embodiment>
・The number of history memories 371 and 372 used to calculate various parameters in the period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to two, and may be three, four, or five or more. If the number is 3, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory will be shifted by 10000 each. are shifted by 7500 each, and if there are 5 shifts, both the beginning and the end of the period to be managed by each history memory are shifted by 6000 respectively.

The period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to the period until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, and may be 20,000 balls. The number may be less than 30,000, such as 40,000, or more than 30,000, such as 40,000. The number is not limited to 30,000, which is divisible by the number of history memories 371 and 372, and may be 30,001, which is not divisible by the number of history memories 371 and 372. FIG. If the number is not divisible, the number of discharges to be managed by each history memory 371, 372 is A (specifically, 30001), and the number of history memories 371, 372 is B (specifically, 2). number), the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of quotients of A/B (specifically, 15000 pieces), and 1 is added to the quotient of A/B. A configuration may be adopted in which both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number (specifically, 15001).

- Instead of the history memories 371 and 372, counters such as the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment may be used. Then, the counter corresponding to the first history memory 371 and the counter corresponding to the second history memory 372 are respectively stored with the number of balls entered into each ball entering portion, and the stored number of balls entered is used. are configured to calculate various parameters as in the nineteenth embodiment. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various parameters while partially overlapping the first period and the second period, which are periods until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. Become.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration using a plurality of history memories such as the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. For example, history information over a long period of time as in the third embodiment , extracts history information corresponding to the first period from the history information stored in the history area, calculates various parameters, and calculates the relevant A configuration may be adopted in which history information corresponding to a second period partially overlapping with the first period is extracted and various parameters are calculated. In this case, by setting the history area to a capacity capable of sufficiently storing the history information in the period until 45,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, each of the first period and the second period It is possible to extract history information corresponding to .

When writing history information to the history memories 371 and 372, the pointer information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated after the history information is written in the areas corresponding to the pointer information indicated in the pointer areas 371c and 372c. The area to which the new history information is written is always fixed, and the information stored in each area may be sequentially shifted when writing the new history information. For example, if there are 1st to 5th areas, the area in which new history information is written is always the 1st area. After each information is shifted such as area, third area→fourth area, second area→third area, first area→second area, new history information may be written in the first area.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) In the above-described first embodiment, etc., all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are objects of storage of history information (or winning history). However, it is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 has history information may be stored. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, or only the general winning opening 31 may be configured to store history information. It's okay. Even in this case, it is possible to ascertain the manner in which game balls enter the ball-entering portion in which the history information is stored during a predetermined period.

(2) In the above-described first embodiment and the like, the first winning hole detection sensor 42a, the second winning hole detecting sensor 43a, and the third winning hole detecting sensor 44a are made to correspond to each of the winning hole detection sensor 44a, so as to correspond to the ball entry result of the game ball. Although the signal paths 118a to 118c for transmitting information have been set, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if there are a plurality of ball-entering parts and a plurality of ball-entering detection sensors corresponding to them, the information may be transmitted as one type of information. This makes it possible to reduce the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 .

(3) In the first embodiment and the like, correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, it is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, there is no need to execute processing for making the management IC 66 recognize the correspondence information, so the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

(4) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to be performed at the start of supply of operating power to the main CPU 63, it is not limited to this. The correspondence information may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and is used for both reading and writing, and the correspondence information provided from the main side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after the shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main side CPU 63. Even if the supply of operating power is stopped, it is configured to be stored and held in the correspondence memory 116 . This makes it possible to reduce the frequency with which the correspondence information is transmitted.

(5) Transmission from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 of correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the buffers 122a to 122o in the first embodiment. However, although it is configured to use the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the information of the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a, it is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A dedicated signal path for transmission from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 may be provided. Thereby, the management IC 66 can grasp which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 by the type of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

(6) In the first embodiment, information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63 . For example, various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 based on history information may be transmitted to the main side CPU 63 . In this case, the main CPU 63 may be configured to directly execute notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. , the master side CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound light emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are displayed using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54 and the pattern display device 41. The configuration may be such that the corresponding notification is executed.

(7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the pattern display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to check whether or not the game ball entry state in the game area PA was normal on the business day immediately before the opening of the game hall.

(8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start the game until the prohibition release operation is performed. may be As a configuration that prevents the game from starting, for example, it may be configured to prohibit the shooting of game balls, or may be configured to disable the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. A configuration may be adopted in which the winning/failure determination process is not executed even if a prize is won to 33 or the second operation opening 34 . Further, the prohibition release operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again while the RAM erasing switch is turned on. It is good also as operation of the operation means which becomes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the game ball enters the game area PA in an abnormal manner.

(9) Although the history information corresponding to the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed by either the main side CPU 63 or the management side CPU 112. may not be executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by the operator of the reading operation. A reading device may be configured to calculate various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

(10) The management IC 66 may not be provided, and the main side CPU 63 may be provided with the function of executing the history information storage process and the function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. The CPU 92 may be provided with the configuration, or the audio emission control device 81 may be provided with the configuration. When the payout side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 has these functions, the information of the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main side CPU 63 to the control body having the functions. It will happen.

(11) The management IC 66 is provided with a separate power supply from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 can calculate various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be capable of outputting information of history information or various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

(12) The reading terminal 102 used to read the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used to read history information or various parameters with a reading device, but this is not the only option. Instead, a terminal used for reading the history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64 . In this case, the terminals used for reading the history information or various parameters may be provided on the MPU 62 or may be provided at a position different from the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 .

(13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as flash memory. Any one of 116, 117 and 131 is provided as a volatile storage means that requires power supply to store and retain information, and by supplying backup power to the memory, operating power to the main side CPU 63 is reduced. The information may be stored and held even if the supply of is stopped. In this case, a dedicated backup power device may be provided for the memory, and backup power may be supplied to the memory from the power supply/launch control device 78 that supplies backup power to the main RAM 65. good too.

(14) It is not limited to the configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and history information is not stored and held, and a game ball is detected by one of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 48a. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at arbitrary timing.

(15) The management IC 66 is not limited to a configuration in which the management side CPU 112 is provided as a general-purpose CPU, and history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing are executed based on the programs and data stored in the management side ROM 113. , a hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66 . Specifically, for the configuration, for example, in the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal from the main side CPU 63 indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a. , the correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored from the correspondence memory 116 to the history memory 117, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. do. Further, for example, in the case of the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by one of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main side CPU 63, the signal is received. The value of the counter corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that point in time when a calculation trigger occurs in the first embodiment. Further, when an external output opportunity to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters, which are the calculation results, and also outputs the history information.

(16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entering ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, a configuration in which the occurrence of a transition to the opening/closing execution mode is stored as history information may be employed. The transition timing to the opening/closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information. The occurrence of is stored as history information. Further, by using the history information as described above, a configuration may be employed in which the probability of transition to the opening/closing execution mode is calculated, or a configuration in which the probability of transition to the high-frequency support mode is calculated. The configuration may be such that the frequency of occurrence is calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

(17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

(18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted, while the general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33 and History information including RTC information may be stored with respect to entering a ball into a privilege opportunity ball entering portion that triggers payout of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and the winning/failure determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball entry part with respect to the total number of discharged game balls while making it possible to extract the history of game balls entering the privilege opportunity ball entry part. Become.

(19) A configuration may be adopted in which items other than those in each of the above embodiments are included as objects to be left as history information. For example, at least one of the fact that the lower tray 56a has become full, the timing at which the full-tank state started, and the timing at which the full-tank state is canceled may be stored as history information. At least one of the no-ball state, the timing at which the no-ball state was started, and the timing at which the no-ball state was canceled may be stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 was in an abnormal state. Alternatively, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the dispensing device 76 was released may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

(20) In the above-described first embodiment, etc., it is assumed in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the sixteenth buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I/F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal. However, it is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. may be configured. In this case, there is no need to set in advance in the management IC 66 the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p.

(21) The number of game balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of entering balls was grasped using the history information. may be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball entry portion in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it becomes possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. Also, the number of balls entering a predetermined ball entering portion that occurred while the front door frame 14 was open is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurred, and the calculated number of balls entering is an abnormal number. In some cases, an anomaly notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with a fraudulent act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entering section.

(22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether the management IC 66 is operating normally.

(23) In the above-described first embodiment, etc., the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a-122o may be reversed from that in the above-described first embodiment. In this case, the order in which the master side CPU 63 executes the processing for changing the output state of each signal and the order in which the management side CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing for the buffers 122a to 122o match.

(24) When using the reading terminal 102 to output information stored in the main ROM 64, the configuration may be such that one of the program and data can be selectively output. It is good also as a structure which can externally output only. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from the selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. can be considered.

(25) Different information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information or various parameters. may store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality, and the stored history information may be output to the outside through the reading terminal 102 .

(26) Detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for each of the out port 24a, the general prize winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a Although the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is grasped by totaling the number of game balls detected by the above, it is not limited to this, for example, all the game balls discharged from the game area PA A passage area through which the game balls pass one by one may be provided, and an ejection detection sensor for detecting the game balls passing through the passage area may be provided. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. In addition, in this configuration, as in the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls entering each of the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34 By providing 42a to 47a, it becomes possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls entering each ball entry portion to the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA.

(27) Display control based on commands sent from the main controller 60 instead of the configuration in which the display controller 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on commands sent from the main controller 60 The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81 . Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are provided separately, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of these two control devices may be changed. may be integrated into the main controller 60 , or both functions of both controllers may be integrated into the main controller 60 . Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are arbitrary.

(28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated and a jackpot is obtained when a coin is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrangement ball machine, a mahball, or the like.

In addition, a non-ball game machine, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. or after the reels are stopped by the lapse of a predetermined time, if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is formed on the effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window, a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body which is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage portion and a take-in device, and after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage portion are taken in by the take-in device, the start lever is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the reels start rotating.

When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, for example, when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever, the result of the lottery process executed for the winning combination is stored as history information. , and the history information may be used to calculate the actual winning probability of each combination. The information may be used to calculate the actual probability of transition to the special game state, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special game state to the total number of games played may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device, or the game machine itself may provide notification corresponding to the calculation results of the various parameters.

(29) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in arbitrary combinations. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. The characteristic configuration of the embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the fourth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the eighth embodiment may be combined. Also, the characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the seventeenth embodiment may be combined. Also, the characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment and the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment may be combined. In addition, any combination of the configurations of the different modes may be applied to the configuration in which the characteristic configurations of the first to seventeenth embodiments are applied in a predetermined combination.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means (main side RAM 65). function) and
Privilege for executing processing for granting a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means. Granting means (function of executing the process of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, function of executing the process of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92);
In a game machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, the main side RAM 65) executes predetermined information (the first Predetermined storage executing means (the first In the ninth, eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S2320 and S2323.

According to the feature A1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to it is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player. be done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entering means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the prescribed ball entry means, the information corresponding to the entry is stored in the prescribed storage means, and the number or frequency of entry of the game ball into the prescribed ball entry means is determined. can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine is stored in the prescribed storage means. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of processing for awarding a privilege to the player.

According to feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means by not triggering the execution of the processing for giving a privilege to the player based on the predetermined information. It becomes possible to store and hold the predetermined information in the form of information.

Feature A3. A specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, and stores the information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, in the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments, The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

According to feature A3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball-entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Feature A4. All the ball entry means for ejecting the entered game ball from the game area, including the predetermined ball entry means, are objects to be stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entry. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball-entering means.

According to feature A4, all ball entry means for discharging game balls from the game area are subject to management using information stored in the predetermined storage means. can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. Further, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entry means to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using the information stored in the prescribed storage means.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means.

According to feature A5, the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means is included in the predetermined information. It is possible to grasp the ball entry history in detail.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information on the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball-entering means.

According to feature A6, since the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball-entering means, the amount of information of the predetermined information is suppressed, and the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball-entering means. can be managed.

Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation. In the first to seventh embodiments, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809; in the eighth embodiment, the management-side CPU 112 has a function of executing the processing of step S2104; A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the side CPU 112 .

According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation.

Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7, characterized by comprising external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the game machine and analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means by using the read information.

Feature A9. A program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main side CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the external output means uses the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature A9, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature A10. A means (main A function of executing the processing of step S902 in the side CPU 63).

According to feature A10, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be output to the outside is the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A11, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the specific memory execution means has the predetermined memory execution means, so that the processing load of the first control means is extremely increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing the undesired operation.

Feature A12. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature A13. A specific ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operation port 33, second operation port 34) that allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter,
The predetermined memory executing means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the specific ball entering means in the predetermined memory means, thereby enabling the game to be played to the specific ball entering means. Specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, ninth to third In the eleventh embodiment, the numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means is
First transmission means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means function to output either) and
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means (first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 function to output either) and
The gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined ball-entering means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific ball-entering means are stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to manage not only the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, but also the manner in which the game ball enters the specific ball entering means. Also, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the ball-entering frequency between the predetermined ball-entering means and the specific ball-entering means.

Further, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means. A second signal path is used to transmit the second information to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature A14. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; A gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage the entry mode of the game ball to the predetermined ball entry means and the entry mode of the game ball to the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the first information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature A15. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means to the second control means. The game machine according to feature A13 or A14, characterized by comprising means for transmitting identification information (function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature A15, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, there is no need to store in advance the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature A16, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature A17. Characteristic feature A15 or A16, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature A17, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature A18. The second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined ball-entering means and the second information corresponds to the specific ball-entering means when the identification information is received. Any one of the features A15 to A17, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a correspondence setting process in the management side CPU 112) for storing the correspondence information in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means is stored in the second control means. Thereby, the second control means is provided with the information that enables the second control means to specify the ball-entering means corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic A15, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of A18.

According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage the entry state of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means and the entry state of the game ball into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature A20. In the second control means, as a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, there are more types of information than the number of types of information to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The game machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

According to feature A20, the second control means is provided with a larger number of receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Accordingly, even if the number of types of information increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with the situation without changing the configuration of the receiving unit. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature A21. First external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
A second external output means (management a function of executing external output processing in the side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and the read information is used to determine the manner in which the game ball enters the predetermined ball entering means and the state of the game ball entering the specific ball entering means. It becomes possible to specify the manner of entering the ball. In addition, when the external output is performed, the information of the combination of the predetermined information and the information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined ball entry means is externally output, and the specific information and the correspondence to the specific ball entry means Information in combination with information that makes it possible to recognize that the person is doing is output to the outside. This makes it possible to specify each ball-entering mode by using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature A22. Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112. In the seventh embodiment, the function of the management side CPU 112 The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, characterized in that it has a function of executing the process of step S2005 (a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). .

According to the feature A22, the game machine calculates the mode information corresponding to the ball entry mode of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means stores information that enables identification of whether or not the game ball entered the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation in the predetermined storage means (first storage means). A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a management side in the ninth embodiment A function to execute the processing of step S2203 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation, and calculates the mode information (first, second, In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, step S1408 in the management side CPU 112; A function of executing the processing of steps S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, A feature A22 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment. The game machine described.

According to the feature A23, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the predetermined situation exists and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game ball entry mode.

Feature A24. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means A function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature A25. Characteristic A22 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in A23.

According to the feature A25, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information is read out and the game ball is entered. When analyzing the mode, it is possible to refer to not only the mode information but also the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specified storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specified storage execution means is started, The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the mode information is calculated.

According to feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is stopped, the mode information is calculated on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature A27. Characteristic features A22 through A22, characterized in that the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means. A gaming machine according to any one of A26.

According to the feature A27, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs while operating power is being supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within one business day. becomes possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized by:

According to feature A28, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature A29. Features A22 to A28 characterized by comprising external output means (a function of executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature A29, by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball.

Feature A30. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein when the external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine, the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A31. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
Characteristic A29, wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device external to the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or A gaming machine described in A30.

According to feature A31, in a configuration in which a processing load on the first control means is reduced by providing a second control means having an external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on an instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). , and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112).

According to feature A32, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the game machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the manner of entering a game ball.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means is
means for determining whether or not the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S1603 in the management-side CPU 112);
means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to feature A32, comprising:

According to the characteristic A33, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature A34. The game according to feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storing and executing means causes the mode information to be accompanied by information that makes it possible to specify the timing at which the mode information was calculated, and causes the calculation result storing means to store the information. machine.

According to the feature A34, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature A35. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics A22 to A34, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to feature A35, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature A36. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, characterized in that

According to feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game ball entry mode without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The game machine according to feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

According to feature A37, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature A38. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
with
The gaming machine according to feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature A38, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature A39. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute a second notification.

According to the feature A39, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature A40. Characteristic A1 to characterized by comprising means for externally outputting correspondence information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means (function for executing the processing of step S218 in the main side CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

According to the feature A40, in the configuration in which the correspondence information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entering means is externally output, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, by using the corresponding information, it is possible to easily grasp the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entering means and the frequency of entering the ball, while using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the predetermined number of game balls are entered. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of game balls entering the ball means and the frequency of entering the ball.

Feature A41. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature A41, the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit can exhibit the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features A1 to A41, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is Predetermined storage executing means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth embodiments) for calculating mode information corresponding to game results in a predetermined period using the predetermined information Then, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management-side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the processing of step S2005 in the management-side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. function, in the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. functions to execute),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation to calculate the mode information (first, second, sixth, eighth, 9, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth and twelfth embodiments, and the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management side in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment.

According to the characteristic B2, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the game is in the predetermined situation and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature B3. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means A function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature B4. Characteristic B1 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. Or the gaming machine described in B2.

According to the feature B4, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of (1), it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B5. Characteristic B1, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The game machine according to any one of B4.

According to the characteristic B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information can be obtained on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature B6. Any one of characteristics B1 to B5, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature B6, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs while operating power is being supplied to the control means, it is possible to finely manage the mode information within the range of one business day. becomes possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by:

According to feature B7, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature B8. Features B1 to B7 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature B8, by outputting the state information to a device outside the gaming machine, it is possible to easily grasp the state of the game ball entering.

Feature B9. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is to be outputted to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B10. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the game machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means, or The gaming machine described in B9.

According to feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time a predetermined calculation trigger occurs,
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). , and in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112).

According to feature B11, it is possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature B12. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature B11, characterized by:

According to the feature B12, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature B13. The game according to feature B11 or B12, characterized in that the result storage execution means causes the calculation result storage means to store information that enables identification of the timing at which the mode information is calculated, accompanying the mode information. machine.

According to the feature B13, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature B14. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics B1 to B13, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to characteristic B14, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature B15. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, characterized in that

According to feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game during a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature B16. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The game machine according to feature B15, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to feature B16, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature B17. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B17, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having a predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature B18. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, wherein the notification means is controlled so as to execute a second notification.

According to the feature B18, the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is reported instead of the mode information as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed in the main RAM 65) is stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments; in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63;
Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, ninth 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112; in the third embodiment, executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 In the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112. In the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112. In the seventh embodiment, the function of the management side CPU 112 a function of executing the process of step S2005 (a function of executing the process of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage processing of the information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature B20. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to feature B20, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features B1 to B20, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is Predetermined storage executing means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in
Information computing means (first, second, sixth, eighth , in the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, steps S1408, S1413, and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 , the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. Then, the function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). function to execute the process of (in the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. . As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Also, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature C2. The result storage execution means includes means for storing the mode information in the calculation result storage means when the mode information is information to be stored (function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112). The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized by:

According to the feature C2, when the mode information as a result of the calculation corresponds to the information to be stored, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage means. As a result, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and to reduce the storage capacity required in the calculation result storage means.

Feature C3. The game according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the result storing execution means causes the mode information to be accompanied by information that enables identification of the time when the mode information is computed, and causes the computation result storage means to store the information. machine.

According to the feature C3, the mode information is accompanied by information that enables specification of when the mode information was calculated. This makes it possible to analyze each piece of mode information while grasping when each piece of mode information was calculated.

Feature C4. The predetermined storage execution means is means for storing in the predetermined storage means information that enables identification of whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments, A function of executing the processing of steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, a function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. function to execute),
The information calculation means extracts or excludes the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation to calculate the mode information (first, second, sixth, eighth, 9, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013 and S1017 in the management side CPU 112 in the tenth and twelfth embodiments, and the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment , the function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the management side in the seventh embodiment. A function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment). game machine.

According to the feature C4, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the game is in the predetermined situation and to calculate the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period.

Feature C5. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth, twelfth embodiments) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means any of the features C1 to C4 characterized by having a function of executing the processing of step S1019 in the management side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1605 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the characteristic C5, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means is erased, thereby making it difficult for the predetermined information to exceed the storage capacity of the predetermined storage means. It is possible to

Feature C6. Characteristic C1 characterized in that even if the mode information is computed by the information computing means, the predetermined information used in computing the mode information is kept stored in the predetermined storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of C5.

According to the characteristic C6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used in calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the mode information can be read out and the game can be played in the predetermined period. When analyzing the result of (1), it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature C7. Characteristic C1, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. The game machine according to any one of C6.

According to the feature C7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control means is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control means is started, the mode information can be obtained on a business day basis. can be managed.

Feature C8. Any one of the features C1 to C7, wherein the information computing means computes the mode information when a computation trigger that can occur repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62). 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature C8, since the mode information is calculated each time a repetitive calculation trigger occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information can be managed in detail within the range of one business day. becomes possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information each time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) reaches a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period when the game is not executed, and restarts the measurement of the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the measurement of the period is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized by:

According to feature C9, since the mode information is calculated each time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of computing the mode information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, when the game is not executed, the measurement of the predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement of the predetermined period is restarted from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude the situation in which the game is not being played from the calculation target of the mode information, and it is possible to appropriately derive the mode information in the situation in which the game is being played.

Feature C10. Features C1 to C9 characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the feature C10, it is possible to easily grasp the ball entry mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

According to the feature C11, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine. It becomes possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature C12. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the external output means;
with
wherein the external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means; or The gaming machine described in C11.

According to the feature C12, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the external output means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. Information can be output to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
with
According to any one of characteristics C1 to C12, the information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. game machine.

According to the feature C13, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the information calculation means separately from the first control means, the mode is controlled based on the instruction from the first control means. It is possible for the information to be calculated by the second control means.

Feature C14. Provided with notification control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the mode information The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, characterized in that

According to the feature C14, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. As a result, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game during a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the game machine.

Feature C15. A control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is accommodated in a board box,
The gaming machine according to feature C14, wherein the notifying means is provided on the control board.

According to the feature C15, it is possible to make unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control means and the notification means difficult.

Feature C16. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
a second control means (management side CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
with
The game machine according to feature C14 or C15, wherein the first control means comprises the information calculation means and the notification control means.

According to feature C16, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing the second control means having the predetermined storage means separately from the first control means, the function of calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to integrate the function for executing the notification corresponding to the first control means.

Feature C17. The notification control means controls the notification means to execute a first notification when the mode information is information in a first range, and when the mode information is information in a second range The game machine according to any one of features C14 to C16, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

According to the feature C17, the mode information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range in which the mode information is included is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification means from becoming too large, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification means.

Feature C18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the information corresponding to it is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed in the main RAM 65) is stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments; in the tenth embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63;
Each time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs, information calculation means (first, second In the second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the steps in the management side CPU 112 A function of executing the processing of steps S1408, S1413 and S1417, a function of executing the processing of step S1602 in the management side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and executing the processing of step S1802 in the management side CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment. function, the function of executing the processing of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63 in the eleventh embodiment);
Result storage execution means (in the third embodiment, steps S1410, S1414 and S1418 in the management side CPU 112) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). function to execute the process of (in the fourth embodiment, the function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C18, when the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the storage processing of the information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible for the game machine to store information for managing the number of game balls entering the prescribed ball entering means or the frequency of entering the ball. It is possible to appropriately manage the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entering means. Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates state information corresponding to the ball entry state of the game ball using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the game ball entry mode, or to externally output the mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Also, it becomes possible to accumulate mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to collectively read a plurality of pieces of state information when managing the state of a game result in a predetermined period.

Feature C19. The game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined memory execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the characteristic C19, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution means or the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features C1 to C19, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, main side in the tenth embodiment). RAM 65), the predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is First storage execution means (1st to 9th, 11th to 12th embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management side CPU 112, in the 10th embodiment, the main side a function of executing the processes of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the CPU 63;
When a specific event occurs as a result of a game, specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments; Second storage executing means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320 and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment); ,
First external output means (management side CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event function to execute external output processing in
Second external output means (management side CPU 112) for outputting the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine so that the specific information can be recognized as corresponding to the specific event function to execute external output processing in
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature D1, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and use the read information to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is externally output in such a manner that it is possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event. The specific information is output to the outside so that it can be recognized. As a result, even if the information is not processed by the second control means, it is possible to specify the mode of occurrence of each event using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising means for externally outputting correspondence information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event (function for executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

According to feature D2, in a configuration in which correspondence information corresponding to a predetermined event is output to the outside when a predetermined event occurs, the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, while the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be easily grasped by using the correspondence information, the number of occurrences and the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be accurately determined by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. It is possible to grasp the

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

According to feature D3, the predetermined information is count information of the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times the specific event has occurred. It becomes possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event.

Feature D4. A program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main CPU 63) that outputs a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The first external output means and the second external output means use the information output section to output the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the game machine. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

According to feature D4, the information stored in the predetermined storage means can be output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage means while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. A selection means ( The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S902 in the main side CPU 63 .

According to feature D5, in the configuration in which the information stored in the predetermined storage means is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be output to the outside is the control program and the predetermined Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature D6. Based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, the selection unit selects the information stored in the predetermined storage unit and the control program for information to be output from the information output unit. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized by specifying which one of them.

According to feature D6, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature D7. A chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section, the first external output means and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6.

According to feature D7, it is possible to integrate the signal paths for the information output section within the chip. This makes it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output section, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features D1 to D7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Program output means (function for executing the processing of step S903 in the main side CPU 63) for outputting the control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output section (reading terminal 102);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management side CPU 112);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to externally output the special information while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

Feature E2. Selection means for specifying which of the special information and the control program the information to be output from the information output unit is, and outputting information corresponding to the specified result (step S902 in the main CPU 63 The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of

According to feature E2, in the configuration in which the special information is externally output using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. This makes it possible to read out only necessary information even in a configuration in which the information output unit is also used.

Feature E3. The selecting means selects, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section, information to be output from the information output section is either the special information or the control program. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by specifying.

According to feature E3, based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit, which information should be output from the information output unit is specified. This makes it possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

Feature E4. Any one of characteristics E1 to E3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output section and the information output means. The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E4, it is possible to integrate the signal paths for the information output section within the chip. This makes it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output section, and at the same time, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features E1 to E4, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A first control means (main side CPU 63) and a second control means (management side CPU 112) are provided,
The first control means is
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player when a predetermined event occurs (the function of executing the processing of step S217 in the main side CPU 63, the function of executing the processing of step S408 in the payout side CPU 92);
Information transmission means (function for executing management output processing in the main side CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when the event occurs;
with
When receiving the predetermined event information, the second control means stores the information corresponding to the predetermined event information in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth memory). In the embodiment, the predetermined information (first to eighth , history information in the twelfth embodiment, and numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) are stored in the predetermined storage means (first to ninth , in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112; A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2323.

According to feature F1, a privilege is given to the player when a predetermined event occurs. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the occurrence of the predetermined event. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event can be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. Predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, since the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege provision means has the predetermined storage execution means, the processing load of the first control means is prevented from increasing excessively. While doing so, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

According to feature F2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. can be prevented.

Feature F3. When a specific event occurs, the predetermined memory executing means executes a process of storing information corresponding to the specific event in the predetermined memory means, thereby storing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of the specific event in the gaming machine or outside the gaming machine. Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. and
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )and,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )and,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event are stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to manage not only the manner in which the predetermined event occurs, but also the manner in which the specific event occurs. Moreover, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the rate of occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

Also, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is sent to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Feature F4. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting identification information that enables the second control means to identify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; The gaming machine according to feature F3, further comprising a function of outputting either a high-frequency support mode signal or a door open signal.

According to the feature F4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, since the identification information that enables identification of whether or not the predetermined situation exists is transmitted to the second control means using the third path, the identification information is transmitted to the first information and the second control means by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as 2 information.

Feature F5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, characterized by comprising transmission means (a function for executing recognition processing in the main side CPU 63).

According to feature F5, since the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, There is no need to store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature F6, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the predetermined event and the specific event can occur. Under certain circumstances, it is possible to allow the second control means to identify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means.

Feature F7. Characteristic feature F5 or F6, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature F7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature F8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, provides correspondence information that makes it possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event. in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management side CPU 112). game machine.

According to the feature F8, the second control means stores the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the type of event. Thereby, the information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. no longer need to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature F9. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic F5, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of F8.

According to the feature F9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature F10. The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature F10, the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit can exhibit the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, and the feature group F, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a first control means (main side CPU 63);
a second control means (management side CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
with
The first control means is
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )and,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (the function of outputting any one of the first to seventh signals in the main side CPU 63 )and,
Identification information transmission means (master side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means a function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G1, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs, and the second signal path is used when the second event occurs. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the types of information to be transmitted correspond to the signal paths, and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the second control means can be simplified.

Further, since identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information , need not be stored in advance in the second control means. This makes it possible to increase the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

According to feature G2, when the supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball may enter the game ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

Feature G3. Characteristic feature G1 or G2, characterized in that the identification information transmission means transmits the identification information to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. game machine.

According to feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. It is possible to simplify the configuration related to communication compared to the above.

Feature G4. When the identification information is received, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G3, characterized in that means for storing relationship information in correspondence storage means (memory for correspondence 116) (function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management side CPU 112) is provided. The game machine described.

According to feature G4, the second control means stores the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball-entering means. Accordingly, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify the event corresponding to the information to be transmitted, each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the first information and the second information.

Feature G5. The first control means is a third transmission means for transmitting third information that enables the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation exists, to the second control means using a third path. (In the first, third to ninth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any one of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63; in the second embodiment, the opening/closing execution mode signal in the main CPU 63; function to output either the high-frequency support mode signal or the door open signal),
Characteristic G1, characterized in that the second control means can recognize that the third information is information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists without receiving the identification information. The game machine according to any one of G4.

According to the feature G5, it is possible to manage the mode of occurrence of the first event and the mode of occurrence of the second event by distinguishing whether or not it is in the predetermined situation. In addition, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation exists can be specified by the second control means without receiving the identification information from the first control means. . This makes it possible to prevent the information format of the identification information from becoming complicated.

Feature G6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the number of types of information required to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is larger than the number of types of information The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein a signal path is provided.

According to the characteristic G6, since the number of signal paths is greater than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the information can be transmitted according to the model of the game machine. Even if the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with this without changing the configuration of the signal path. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the versatility of the second control means.

Feature G7. The game machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

According to the feature G7, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

For the configuration of features G1 to G7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the characteristic group G, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to make the configuration regarding communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in predetermined storage means (the normal counter area 171, the opening/closing execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 in the thirteenth embodiment). ) so that predetermined information (numerical information measured by the counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e in the thirteenth embodiment) is stored in the predetermined storage means. A predetermined storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S3204 to S3205 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (function for executing the processing of step S3504 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Limiting means for limiting the progress of the game in a situation where the mode information is derived by the information deriving means (the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment executes the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 function, the function of executing the process of step S3809 of the main CPU 63 in the fourteenth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the gaming machine derives mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, the gaming machine itself can perform processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period.

Also, in the situation where the mode information is derived, the progress of the game is restricted. Thereby, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallelize the progress of the normal game and the derivation of the mode information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the restricting means restricts execution of at least a part of the processes for progressing the game.

According to feature H2, the execution of at least a part of the processes for progressing the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived, so that the process per unit time is reduced in the situation where the mode information is derived. It is possible to prevent the number from increasing excessively.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the information derivation means derives the mode information after the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means.

According to the feature H3, by deriving the mode information after the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation in which a new occurrence of a predetermined event accompanying the progress of the game does not occur.

Feature H4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special electric winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
with
The predetermined memory execution means stores information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means as the predetermined event, thereby causing the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to the event. so that the information is stored in the predetermined storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the restricting means restricts shooting of game balls by the shooting means.

According to the feature H4, since the mode information is derived after the shooting of the game ball is restricted, the mode information can be obtained in a situation where the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry means that triggers the variation of the mode information is restricted. can be derived.

Feature H5. The information derivation means derives the mode information after a predetermined period of time has passed since the restriction means restricted the shooting of the game ball by the shooting means,
Characteristic feature H4, wherein the predetermined period is set to a period longer than the longest period assumed as a period required for the game ball shot from the shooting means to enter the predetermined ball-entering means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature H5, when the mode information is derived, it is assumed as a period required from when the shooting of the game ball is restricted until the game ball shot from the shooting means enters the predetermined ball entering means. Mode information is derived after a period longer than the maximum period has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the game ball does not reliably enter the predetermined ball-entering means that triggers the variation of the mode information.

Feature H6. The restricting means restricts the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information, and the trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in a situation where a specific action is being performed in the gaming machine. The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the progress of the game is not restricted even if the game is changed.

According to the feature H6, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the mode information derivation opportunity occurs in the situation where the specific action is being performed in the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific action from being hindered by the occurrence of the trigger for deriving the mode information.

Feature H7. The restricting means restricts the progress of the game after the specific action is completed when the mode information derivation opportunity occurs while the specific action is being performed in the gaming machine. The game machine according to feature H6.

According to the feature H7, when a trigger for deriving mode information occurs in a situation where a specific action is being performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the specific action is completed. It is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in response to the generation of the trigger for deriving the mode information, while preventing the mode information from being lost.

Feature H8. A lottery process executing means (a function of executing the process of step S3003 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that executes the lottery process when the lottery condition is satisfied;
A game round control means (13th execution A function of executing the processing of steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 63 in the form);
with
The gaming machine according to feature H6 or H7, wherein the situation in which the specific action is being performed includes a situation in which the game action is being performed by the game action executing means.

According to the feature H8, the progress of the game is not restricted even if the mode information derivation opportunity occurs in the situation where the game rotation motion is being performed. As a result, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while preventing the game rotation from being interrupted.

Feature H9. Equipped with a variable ball entry means (special electric prize winning device 32) that can be in an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be entered,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, wherein the state in which the specific action is performed includes a state in which the variable ball-entering means is in the open state.

According to the feature H9, the progress of the game is not restricted even if a trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in a situation where the variable ball entry means is in an open state. As a result, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while the open state of the variable ball-entering means is not interrupted.

Feature H10. Information storage means (main side RAM 65) in which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game is written in the control means (main side CPU 63);
initialization execution means for executing the initialization of the information storage means when an initialization opportunity occurs (function for executing the processing of step S3709 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Means (main in the thirteenth embodiment) for preventing initialization of the information storage means by the initialization execution means when information is set to limit the progress of the game by the limit means. A function of executing the processing of step S3704 of the side CPU 63);
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature H10, when information is set so that the progress of the game is restricted by the restricting means, the initialization of the information storage means in response to the occurrence of the initialization opportunity is prevented. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation from which the mode information is derived, even if an operation that causes an initialization opportunity is erroneously performed in an attempt to release the restricted situation, the information It is possible to prevent the initialization of the storage means from being executed.

Feature H11. Separate execution means for executing the initialization of the information storage means when another trigger different from the initialization trigger occurs (function for executing the processing of steps S3706 to S3708 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) with
The initialization of the information storage means is performed by the separate execution means even when the information setting for restricting the progress of the game is performed by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to feature H10.

According to the feature H11, even if information is set to restrict the progress of the game by the restriction means, the information storage means is initialized when another opportunity occurs. . As a result, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation in which the mode information is derived, it is possible to leave room for executing the initialization of the information storage means.

Feature H12. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the state in which the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means is released when the restriction period has elapsed.

According to the feature H12, when the mode information is derived, the state in which the progress of the game is restricted is released when the restriction period elapses, so the state in which the progress of the game is restricted is left as it is. It is possible to prevent an event from occurring.

Feature H13. Provided with production control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) for controlling production execution means (symbol display device 41) so that production is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the effect control means continues the execution of the effect even if the restricting means restricts the progress of the game. .

According to the feature H13, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation of deriving the mode information, the execution of the effect by the effect executing means is continued. As a result, even if an opportunity for deriving the mode information occurs while the player is playing the game and the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to prevent the presentation from ending immediately. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

Feature H14. The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) are executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start opportunity occurs (a thirteenth effect control means). A function for executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound and light side CPU 163 in the embodiment of , and a display control device 82),
The series of performance control means controls to end the series of performances even if the predetermined performance period elapses when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in a situation where the series of performances is being executed. is not executed.

According to the feature H14, when the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of a trigger for deriving the mode information in a situation where the series of effects is being executed by the effect execution means, a predetermined value that normally serves as an opportunity to end the series of effects is generated. Even if the performance period has passed, the control for ending the series of performances is not executed. As a result, a series of effects can be continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, and even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived, the performance can be executed. It is possible to make the player think that the game is being continued.

Feature H15. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the limiting means;
A second control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means,
with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means,
The series of performance control means terminates the series of performances even if the predetermined performance period elapses due to the fact that the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in a situation where the series of performances is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature H14, wherein the state of not executing the control for starting is canceled when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

According to the feature H15, the state in which the series of effects are continued in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information is changed from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new effect. Canceled when trigger information is sent. As a result, there is no need to transmit dedicated information for canceling the state in which such a series of performances are continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature H16. As the series of performances, the performance executing means performs a variable display of patterns, and when the series of performances ends, the patterns are waited in a waiting area and after the standby display is performed, the patterns are stopped. The configuration shown is
The series effect control means is characterized by continuing the standby display even if the predetermined effect period elapses when the restricting means restricts the progress of the game while the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature H14 or H15.

According to the feature H16, when a series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, when the series of effects is terminated, the standby display of the stage before the pattern is stopped and displayed continues. be done. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of performances in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while allowing the player to recognize the result of stopping the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is to be terminated, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of effects in response to the cancellation of the restriction on the progress of the game.

Feature H17. In a situation where the progress of the game is restricted by the restricting means, the performance control means continues the performance, but notifies that the restriction is in effect. The game machine according to any one of features H13 to H16.

According to the feature H17, when a series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted in order to derive the mode information, the corresponding notification is also executed, thereby making the series of effects longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused about the continuation.

For the configuration of features H1 to H17, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Production control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) for controlling production execution means (symbol display device 41) so that production is executed,
Limiting means (the function of executing the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main side CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for limiting the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the limit opportunity;
with
The game machine is characterized in that the effect control means continues the execution of the effect even if the restricting means restricts the progress of the game.

According to the feature I1, it is possible to manage the gaming machine appropriately by putting the game in a restricted state based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger. In this case, even if the progress of the game is restricted, the execution of the effect by the effect executing means is continued. As a result, even if the progress of the game is restricted due to the occurrence of a restriction opportunity while the player is playing the game, it is possible to prevent the performance from ending immediately, thereby restricting the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the occurs.

Feature I2. The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a series of effects (effects for game rounds) are executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start opportunity occurs (a thirteenth effect control means). A function for executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound and light side CPU 163 in the embodiment of , and a display control device 82),
The series of performance control means controls to end the series of performances even if the predetermined performance period elapses when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in a situation where the series of performances is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that it does not execute

According to the feature I2, when a restriction opportunity occurs in a situation where a series of performances are being executed by the performance execution means and the progress of the game is restricted, a predetermined performance period which normally serves as a trigger for ending the series of performances has elapsed. Even if it does, the control for ending the series of effects is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to maintain a state in which a series of performances are continued, and even when the progress of the game is restricted, the player is told that the performance is being continued. It is possible to make you think.

Feature I3. a first control means (main side CPU 63) having the limiting means;
A second control means (sound and light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means,
with
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means,
The series of performance control means terminates the series of performances even if the predetermined performance period elapses due to the fact that the restriction means limits the progress of the game in a situation where the series of performances is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the situation in which the control is not executed is canceled when the second control means receives the start opportunity information from the first control means.

According to feature I3, a state in which a series of effects is continued in a situation in which progress of the game is restricted is when start trigger information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means in order to start a new effect. is released at As a result, there is no need to transmit dedicated information for canceling the state in which such a series of performances are continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature I4. As the series of performances, the performance executing means performs a variable display of patterns, and when the series of performances ends, the patterns are waited in a waiting area and after the standby display is performed, the patterns are stopped. The configuration shown is
The series effect control means is characterized by continuing the standby display even if the predetermined effect period elapses when the restricting means restricts the progress of the game while the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature I2 or I3.

According to feature I4, when a series of effects is to be continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the standby display of the stage before the pattern is stopped and displayed is continued when the series of effects is terminated. As a result, it is possible to continue a series of performances in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while allowing the player to recognize the result of stopping the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is to be terminated, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the series of effects in response to the cancellation of the restriction on the progress of the game.

Feature I5. In a situation where the progress of the game is restricted by the restricting means, the performance control means continues the performance, but notifies that the restriction is in effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to the feature I5, when a series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, a corresponding notification is also executed, so that the series of effects continues longer than expected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

For the configuration of features I1 to I5, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means (advantageous game number counter 344b) so that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. a predetermined storage executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S5001 of the main MPU 342 in the sixteenth embodiment);
information deriving means for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (function for executing the process of step S5103 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Based on the fact that the mode information derived by the information deriving means is regulation-compliant information, restricting means for restricting the progress of the game ((steps S5107 to S5113 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic J1, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to the event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Then, mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period is derived by using the predetermined information, and when the derived mode information is information corresponding to regulation, the progress of the game is restricted. . As a result, it is possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the manner in which the predetermined event occurs, and if the manner in which the predetermined event occurs does not match the manner assumed at the design stage of the game machine, it can be dealt with. It becomes possible to As described above, it is possible to suitably manage the game machine.

Feature J2. Characteristic J1, wherein the restricting means provides a restriction to prevent the mode information from becoming the regulatory compliance information based on the fact that the mode information is the regulatory compliance information. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature J2, even if the mode information becomes regulation-compliant information, a constraint is given so that the mode information does not become regulation-compliant information. As a result, even if the mode information becomes regulation-compliant information, it is possible to ensure that the mode information is within the range assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J3. State transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main side MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined termination opportunity occurs (function for executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
with
Characteristic feature J1 or J2, characterized in that the restricting means terminates the predetermined game state even if the predetermined termination opportunity does not occur, based on the fact that the mode information is information corresponding to the regulation. game machine.

According to the feature J3, when the mode information is regulation-compliant information, the predetermined game state is terminated even if the predetermined termination opportunity has not occurred. As a result, it is possible to forcibly end the predetermined game state according to the manner in which the predetermined event occurs. It is possible to restrict the execution mode of the game state.

Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to the characteristic J4, when the mode of occurrence of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to restrict the degree of advantage.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined game state.

According to the feature J5, the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated when the mode of occurrence of the predetermined event that occurs in the predetermined game state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the game machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined game state from deviating from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J6. The predetermined period is configured to elapse when the number of games is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature J5, wherein the predetermined reference number of times is greater than the number of times the predetermined game state is continued to be played when the predetermined game state is newly started.

According to the feature J6, it is possible to prevent the situation where the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event from occurring in each predetermined game state.

Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, wherein a condition for generating the predetermined termination opportunity in the predetermined game state is not reported.

According to feature J7, since the condition for generating the predetermined termination opportunity in the predetermined game state is not notified, even if the predetermined game state is forcibly terminated in relation to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, the player feels uncomfortable. It becomes possible not to give

Feature J8. State transition means for shifting the game state to a predetermined game state (function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main side MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined game state when a predetermined termination opportunity occurs (function for executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
with
Any one of the characteristics J1 to J7, wherein the restricting means restricts the transition to the predetermined game state after that based on the fact that the mode information is information corresponding to the regulation. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature J8, when the mode information is regulation-compliant information, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is regulated. As a result, it becomes possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the predetermined game state according to the manner in which the predetermined event occurs. In some cases, it is possible to restrict the execution mode of the game state.

Feature J9. The gaming machine according to feature J8, wherein the restricting means varies a period during which subsequent transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted according to the mode information.

According to the feature J9, the period during which the transition to the predetermined game state is restricted varies according to the mode information, so the restriction on the transition to the predetermined game state is excessively small regardless of the mode information. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent an excessive setting.

Feature J10. The state transition means is transition determination means (main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) that executes transition determination processing for determining whether or not to transition to the predetermined game state based on the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity. A function to execute the processing of steps S4903 to S4905),
In this game machine, when the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the occurrence of the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means, an alternative privilege is awarded instead of executing the transition determination process. The gaming machine according to feature J8 or J9, characterized in that it comprises privilege giving means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4912 to S4914 of the main side MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment).

According to the feature J10, when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation in which the transition to the predetermined game state is forcibly prevented in relation to the mode information, to determine whether to transition to the predetermined game state Although the shift determination process of is not executed, a substitute privilege is given. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that it was useless when the predetermined opportunity occurs in the situation where the transition to the predetermined game state is forcibly blocked.

Feature J11. The alternative privilege providing means determines that the content of the alternative privilege is more advantageous as the number of occurrences of the predetermined opportunity in a situation where the occurrence of the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restricting means. The gaming machine according to feature J10, wherein the content of the alternative privilege is made more advantageous.

According to the feature J11, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the occurrence of the predetermined opportunity even in a situation where the transition to the predetermined game state is forcibly blocked.

Feature J12. The gaming machine according to feature J10 or J11, further comprising means for notifying that the alternative privilege has been granted.

According to the feature J12, the player's motivation to continue the game is lost even in the situation where the transition to the predetermined game state is forcibly blocked by being notified that the substitute privilege is given. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

Feature J13. When the substitute privilege is provided, the transition to the predetermined game state is likely to occur after the situation in which the restriction means restricts the transition to the predetermined game state is released. The gaming machine according to any one of features J10 to J12.

According to the feature J13, it is possible to associate the granting of the substitute privilege with the transition to the predetermined gaming state. As a result, even if a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined game state is forcibly prevented, the player can expect the transition to the predetermined game state. .

Feature J14. The game machine according to any one of characteristics J8 to J13, wherein the predetermined game state is a game state advantageous to the player.

According to the feature J14, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed at the design stage of the game machine, it is possible to restrict the advantage.

Feature J15. The game machine according to any one of features J8 to J14, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined game state.

According to the feature J15, when the mode of occurrence of the predetermined event that occurs in the predetermined game state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the game machine, the transition to the predetermined game state is forcibly prevented. be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined game state from deviating from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

For the configuration of features J1 to J15, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. An opening/closing body (front door 312) that can be opened and closed;
a predetermined device (main controller 340) provided in a predetermined area exposed when the opening operation of the opening/closing body is performed;
illumination means (illumination devices 349a and 349b) capable of illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device by entering an illumination state;
lighting control means for adjusting the control state of the lighting means according to the position of the opening/closing body (function for executing lighting processing in the main MPU 342);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, in the configuration in which the opening operation of the opening/closing member is performed when confirming the presence or absence of an abnormality in the predetermined device, lighting means for illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device is provided, It becomes easier to perform the confirmation. In this case, the control state of the illumination means is adjusted according to the position of the opening/closing body. Thereby, it is possible to perform illumination by the illumination means in a preferable manner according to the position of the opening/closing body. Therefore, it is possible to suitably manage the gaming machine.

Feature K2. The illumination control means controls the illumination means so that the lighting means is in a non-illumination state when the opening/closing body is closed, and is in a lighting state based on the opening operation of the opening/closing body. The gaming machine according to the characterizing feature K1.

According to the feature K2, when the opening/closing body is closed, the illumination means is in the non-illumination state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illuminating means from being in an unnecessarily illuminated state in a situation where confirmation of the predetermined device is not performed. Further, when the opening operation of the opening/closing body is performed, the lighting means automatically enters the lighting state. As a result, it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for bringing the lighting means into the lighting state, so that it is easy to perform the work of confirming the predetermined device.

Feature K3. The game machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the illumination means is provided in the predetermined area.

According to the characteristic K3, since the lighting means is provided in the predetermined area, it becomes easy to illuminate the predetermined device by the lighting means according to the opening operation of the opening/closing body.

Feature K4. the opening/closing body is displaceable within a predetermined displacement range from a closed position to a maximum open position;
The lighting control means controls the lighting means so as to achieve the lighting state when the opening/closing body exists in a part of the illumination corresponding range of the predetermined displacement range, and the opening operation of the opening/closing body is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the lighting means is controlled so as to be in a non-illumination state when the lighting means is not present in the lighting correspondence range although the lighting means is present.

According to the feature K4, the illumination means is not illuminated regardless of the open position of the opening/closing body, but is selectively illuminated at some open positions. . As a result, it is possible to set the illumination means to be in the illuminated state only in situations favorable for checking the predetermined device, and to set the illumination means to be in the non-illumination state in situations where it is rather difficult to check the predetermined device if the illumination means is in the illuminated state. Become.

Feature K5. The illumination correspondence range does not include the maximum open position,
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the illumination control means controls the illumination means so as to bring the non-illuminated state when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position.

According to the characteristic K5, the illumination means is in a non-illumination state when the opening/closing body is in the maximum open position. Thus, in a situation where the predetermined device is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall, the lighting means is in a non-illuminated state, so that the lighting by the lighting means does not make it difficult to confirm the predetermined device. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature K6. Any one of features K1 to K5, wherein the predetermined device is a control device having a control board (main control board 341) and a transparent box (board box 345) that houses the control board. The game machine described.

According to the characteristic K6, since the control device is illuminated by the lighting means in response to the opening operation of the opening/closing body, it becomes easier to check the control board and the board box of the control device.

Feature K7. A box body (housing 311) opened toward the front of the gaming machine,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the front opening of the box is closed,
The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the predetermined area exists in the inner space of the box.

According to the characteristic K7, it is possible to illuminate the predetermined device provided inside the box body in accordance with the opening operation of the opening/closing body.

For the configuration of features K1 to K7, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of a game, the information corresponding to the event is stored in predetermined storage means (the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment, and the first accumulation buffer in the nineteenth embodiment). Predetermined storage execution means (main MPU 342 in the 18th embodiment) for storing predetermined information in the predetermined storage means by executing it in the history memory 371 and the second history memory 372) a function of executing game management processing (a function of executing history setting processing in the management side CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment);
Information calculation means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5503 and S5508 in the main MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment; 19, the function of executing the processing of steps S5804 and S5807 in the management side CPU 112);
with
As the predetermined storage means, the first storage means (first accumulation buffer 363 in the 18th embodiment, the first history memory 371 in the 19th embodiment) and the second storage means (in the 18th embodiment At least a second accumulation buffer 364, a second history memory 372 in the nineteenth embodiment,
The predetermined memory execution means is
When the predetermined event occurs in the first period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the first storage means by storing the information corresponding to the event in the first storage means. First predetermined storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S5404, S5409 and S5414 in the main side MPU 342 in the eighteenth embodiment, the processing of step S5704 in the management side CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment function) and
When the predetermined event occurs during the second period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the second storage means by storing the information corresponding to the event in the second storage means. Second predetermined storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S5406, S5411 and S5416 in the main MPU 342 in the 18th embodiment, the processing of step S5707 in the management side CPU 112 in the 19th embodiment function) and
with
A gaming machine, wherein one of the first periods and one of the second periods partially overlap.

According to feature L1, when a predetermined event occurs, the information corresponding to that event is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, information for managing the number of occurrences or the frequency of occurrence of a predetermined event can be stored in the game machine, and by using this managed information, the manner of occurrence of the predetermined event can be appropriately managed. It becomes possible to go to Further, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the game machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the predetermined information.

Further, the game machine calculates mode information corresponding to the result of the game during a predetermined period of time using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to carry out processing corresponding to the result of a game during a predetermined period, or to externally output mode information, which is the result of calculation using predetermined information. Become.

Further, a first storage means and a second storage means are provided as predetermined storage means, and management is performed in the first period as a predetermined period using the first storage means, and a predetermined period is managed using the second storage means. Management is performed in a second period as a period, and one first period and one second period partially overlap. As a result, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the management result in the first period in the middle of the second period, and to derive the mode information corresponding to the management result in the second period in the middle of the first period. Information can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the mode information while securing the first period and the second period as the periods in which management is performed. Furthermore, even if the respective storage capacities of the first storage means and the second storage means are not excessively increased, the mode information is derived while securing the first period and the second period as the periods in which management is performed. It is possible to increase the frequency.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the first period and the second period have the same condition for ending the period.

According to feature L2, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to a certain period even in a configuration in which management is performed using the first storage unit and the second storage unit.

Feature L3. The first predetermined storage executing means starts a new first period following the first period when one of the first periods ends,
The second predetermined storage executing means starts a new second period following the second period when one of the second periods ends,
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein a difference between the first period and the second period is constant.

According to the feature L3, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain amount of deviation has occurred.

Feature L4. The first predetermined storage executing means starts a new first period following the first period when one of the first periods has ended, and when the one of the first periods has ended. and when the state information in the first period is calculated by the information calculation means, the first storage means is initialized, or the order of the storage areas to be stored in the first storage means is set to the first order. death,
The second predetermined storage executing means starts a new second period following the second period when one of the second periods has ended, and the second period of time has ended. and when the state information in the second period is calculated by the information calculation means, the second storage means is initialized, or the order of the storage areas to be stored in the second storage means is set to the first order. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, characterized by:

According to feature L4, the capacity of the first storage means is sufficient to store the predetermined information corresponding to the first period, and the second storage means can store the predetermined information corresponding to the second period. Any available capacity is sufficient. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the capacities of the first storage means and the second storage means.

Feature L5. When the first period has passed, the content corresponding to the mode information in the first period calculated by the information calculating means is notified, and when the second period has passed, the information calculating means It is characterized by comprising a means (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing management processing in the main side MPU 342) for announcing the content corresponding to the aspect information in the calculated second period. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4.

According to the feature L5, the content corresponding to the mode information is reported as the first period and the second period each elapse, thereby reporting the content corresponding to the mode information in a situation relatively close to the current situation. It becomes possible to

For the configuration of features L1 to L5, features A1 to A41, features B1 to B20, features C1 to C19, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E4, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G7, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the feature group H, the feature group I, the feature group J, the feature group K, and the feature group L, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion, for example. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

A game machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and the operation of the stop operation means is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. The game machine stops the variable display of the plurality of pictures after a predetermined period of time has passed, and gives a privilege to the player according to the pictures after the stop.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 24a... Out slot, 31... General winning slot, 32... Special electric winning device, 33... First operating slot, 34... Second operating slot, 41... Symbol display device, 61... Main control board, 62... MPU 63 Main side CPU 65 Main side RAM 82 Display control device 92 Payment side CPU 102 Reading terminal 112 Management side CPU 116 Correspondence memory 131 Calculation result Memory 151 Notification light emitting unit 163 Sound and light side CPU 171 Normal counter area 171a to 171e Counter 172 Opening/closing execution mode counter area 172a to 172e Counter 173 High frequency support mode counter area 173a to 173e counter 311 housing 312 front door 340 main control unit 341 main control board 342 main MPU 344b advantageous game number counter 345 board box 349a, 349b... Lighting device.

Claims (1)

Effect control means for controlling the effect execution means so that the effect is executed;
Limiting means for limiting the progress of a game based on the occurrence of a limit opportunity;
with
The game machine is characterized in that the effect control means continues the execution of the effect even if the restricting means restricts the progress of the game.

Images